v12 Complet

You might also like

Download as pdf or txt
Download as pdf or txt
You are on page 1of 226

TQC

Tokheim Quality Calculator

TQC Service manual V12 English

Part number: 955745-012

Doc. ID: TQC Service manual V12 English.docx


Version: 12.4
Pages: 226

Copyright  2015 Tokheim


DOCUMENT INFORMATION

Authors:
Jeffrey Vanspauwen
Aléssio Gijsbrechts

REVISION HISTORY
Version. Date Author Description
Revision
12.1 08-06-2015 Aléssio Gijsbrechts Initial documents based on TQC Service Manual V11
12.2 12-10-2015 Aléssio Gijsbrechts Edited moved menus and added new functionalities
12.3 09-12-2015 Aléssio Gijsbrechts Formatting and part number integrated
12.4 09-12-2015 Brahim Akechtabou Renamed the document into TQC Service manual V12
English

REFERENCES

Document Location
TQC Service Manual
//TNG/Documentation/Manuals/TQC Service manual_V09.docx
V09.02
HHT User Interface Manual
//TNG/Documentation/Manuals/TQC_User_Manual.doc
V07.70

Copyright  2015 Tokheim


TQC Service Manual V12.3 Page 2 of 226
TABLE OF CONTENTS

1. INTRODUCTION............................................................................................................................................ 10
1.1.1. Background ..................................................................................................................................... 10
1.2. HEALTH & SAFETY ..................................................................................................................................... 10
1.2.1. Safety checklist ................................................................................................................................ 10
1.2.2. Duties of the employees .................................................................................................................. 10
1.2.3. Hazards ........................................................................................................................................... 11
1.2.4. Warning signs .................................................................................................................................. 12
1.2.5. Personal protective equipment ........................................................................................................ 13
1.2.5.1. Protective Clothing .................................................................................................................................. 13
1.2.5.2. Safety Equipment for Working in Hazardous Areas ................................................................................ 13
1.2.5.3. Safety Instructions ................................................................................................................................... 13
1.2.6. The ATEX directive .......................................................................................................................... 13
1.3. NOMENCLATURE ....................................................................................................................................... 14
2. PRODUCT INFORMATION ........................................................................................................................... 16
2.1. TQC SYSTEM OVERVIEW ........................................................................................................................... 16
2.1.1. TQC with EIO board ........................................................................................................................ 16
2.1.1.1. Piggyback boards and displays ............................................................................................................... 16
2.1.1.2. Field-Programmable gate array ............................................................................................................... 16
2.1.1.3. The CAN-bus .......................................................................................................................................... 17
2.1.1.4. General purpose connectors ................................................................................................................... 17
2.1.1.5. Pulser, pre-processor and vapour recovery circuitry ............................................................................... 18
2.1.1.6. Other communication interfaces .............................................................................................................. 18
2.1.2. Electromechanical totalizer.............................................................................................................. 19
2.1.3. Magnetic pulsers ............................................................................................................................. 19
2.1.3.1. Temperature compensation .................................................................................................................... 20
2.1.3.2. Electronic calibration ............................................................................................................................... 20
2.1.4. TQC-EST board ............................................................................................................................... 21
2.1.5. Processor boards ............................................................................................................................ 22
2.1.5.1. ARM processor board ............................................................................................................................. 22
2.1.5.2. SITARA processor board ........................................................................................................................ 23
2.1.6. Hydraulic modules ........................................................................................................................... 23
2.1.6.1. HYM current detection values ................................................................................................................. 24
2.1.7. TQC communication boards ............................................................................................................ 25
2.1.8. Vapour recovery .............................................................................................................................. 26
2.1.8.1. Vapour recovery meter ............................................................................................................................ 26
2.1.8.2. Energy limiting unit .................................................................................................................................. 27
2.1.8.3. VR mini-master ....................................................................................................................................... 27
2.1.9. TQC-LCD ......................................................................................................................................... 28
2.1.9.1. Power supply unit .................................................................................................................................... 28
2.1.9.1.1. Battery back-up .................................................................................................................................. 29
2.1.9.2. Cabling overview of the TQC-LCD .......................................................................................................... 29
2.1.10. TQC-VGA ..................................................................................................................................... 30
2.1.10.1. Single board computer ............................................................................................................................ 30
2.1.10.2. Power supply unit .................................................................................................................................... 30
2.1.10.2.1. Battery Backup .................................................................................................................................. 31
2.1.10.2.2. IO Board ............................................................................................................................................ 31
2.1.10.3. Display and speakers .............................................................................................................................. 32
2.1.10.3.1. Screen layout ..................................................................................................................................... 32
2.1.10.3.2. IR sensor board ................................................................................................................................. 34
2.1.10.4. Advertisement media files ....................................................................................................................... 34
2.1.10.5. Cabling overview of the TQC-VGA .......................................................................................................... 35
2.1.11. Slave IO board ............................................................................................................................. 35
2.1.11.1. Power distribution .................................................................................................................................... 36
2.1.11.2. Additional preset interface ....................................................................................................................... 36
2.1.11.3. General purpose connectors ................................................................................................................... 36
2.1.11.4. Fleet interface ......................................................................................................................................... 36
2.1.11.5. Auxiliary motor output.............................................................................................................................. 36
3. USER INTERFACE DESIGN......................................................................................................................... 37
3.1. HAND HELD TERMINAL ............................................................................................................................... 37

Copyright  2015 Tokheim


TQC Service Manual V12.3 Page 3 of 226
3.1.1. IrDA interface ................................................................................................................................... 38
3.1.2. Alphanumeric keypad ...................................................................................................................... 38
3.1.3. Dot matrix display ............................................................................................................................ 39
3.1.4. Communication port ........................................................................................................................ 39
3.1.5. Rechargeable battery ...................................................................................................................... 39
3.1.6. Main functions of the hand held terminal......................................................................................... 40
3.1.7. Dot matrix display ............................................................................................................................ 40
3.1.8. Function buttons .............................................................................................................................. 41
3.1.9. Alphanumeric keypad ...................................................................................................................... 41
4. OPERATING WITH THE HHT ....................................................................................................................... 42
4.1. OVERVIEW ................................................................................................................................................ 42
4.1.1. Operating distance conditions ......................................................................................................... 43
4.1.2. Information on display ..................................................................................................................... 43
4.1.3. Select an Option in the Menu .......................................................................................................... 43
4.1.4. Operations Menu Architecture ......................................................................................................... 44
4.2. HAND HELD TERMINAL EXTENDER ............................................................................................................. 45
4.2.1. Introduction ...................................................................................................................................... 45
4.2.2. Warning ........................................................................................................................................... 45
4.2.3. Operation ......................................................................................................................................... 45
5. HYDRAULIC CONFIGURATION NAMING CONVENTION ......................................................................... 46
5.1. BASIC NAME PART .................................................................................................................................... 46
5.1.1. Hydraulic Stack Descriptors ............................................................................................................ 46
6. MENU ORGANISATION ............................................................................................................................... 47
6.1. PIN ONLY ACCESS TYPE ............................................................................................................................ 47
6.1.1. Access levels ................................................................................................................................... 48
6.1.2. PIN code error handling................................................................................................................... 48
6.2. W HITELIST ACCESS TYPE ........................................................................................................................... 49
6.3. FUNCTION KEY HANDLING: ......................................................................................................................... 51
6.3.1. Version Info ..................................................................................................................................... 51
6.3.2. Shift Totals ....................................................................................................................................... 51
6.3.3. Meter throughput function................................................................................................................ 52
6.3.4. Request totals .................................................................................................................................. 52
7. MENU DETAILS ............................................................................................................................................ 53
7.1. OPERATION .............................................................................................................................................. 53
7.1.1. Totals ............................................................................................................................................... 53
7.1.1.1. Totals per dispenser ................................................................................................................................ 54
7.1.1.2. Totals per pump ...................................................................................................................................... 54
7.1.1.3. Totals per meter ...................................................................................................................................... 55
7.1.1.4. Shift Totals .............................................................................................................................................. 55
7.1.2. Read Transaction ............................................................................................................................ 56
7.1.2.1. Transaction details .................................................................................................................................. 56
7.2. MANAGEMENT ........................................................................................................................................... 57
7.2.1. Delivery mode .................................................................................................................................. 57
7.2.2. Unit Price ......................................................................................................................................... 59
7.2.3. VGA Setting ..................................................................................................................................... 59
7.2.3.1. VGA Audio .............................................................................................................................................. 59
7.2.3.2. Backlight Switch ...................................................................................................................................... 60
7.2.4. Start New Shift ................................................................................................................................. 60
7.2.5. PIN Code ......................................................................................................................................... 60
7.2.5.1. Level 1 PIN.............................................................................................................................................. 61
7.2.5.2. Level 2 PIN.............................................................................................................................................. 61
7.2.5.3. PIN change errors ................................................................................................................................... 62
7.3. MAINTENANCE .......................................................................................................................................... 62
7.3.1. Dispenser status .............................................................................................................................. 63
7.3.1.1. Motor Protection ...................................................................................................................................... 64
7.3.1.2. Valve protection ...................................................................................................................................... 64
7.3.1.3. Zero transaction ...................................................................................................................................... 65
7.3.1.4. Leak error ................................................................................................................................................ 65

Copyright  2015 Tokheim


TQC Service Manual V12.3 Page 4 of 226
7.3.1.5. Slow Flow ................................................................................................................................................ 66
7.3.1.6. Preset overrun ......................................................................................................................................... 66
7.3.1.7. Vapour..................................................................................................................................................... 66
7.3.1.7.1. Error Examples .................................................................................................................................. 66
7.3.1.8. Controller Area Network module ............................................................................................................. 67
7.3.1.9. Dispenser block ....................................................................................................................................... 67
7.3.1.10. PUMP block ............................................................................................................................................ 68
7.3.1.11. Nozzle block ............................................................................................................................................ 68
7.3.1.12. Bind SD card integrity.............................................................................................................................. 69
7.3.1.13. Integrity ................................................................................................................................................... 69
7.3.1.14. Smd Motor Error ...................................................................................................................................... 70
7.3.2. Diagnostic Info ................................................................................................................................. 70
7.3.2.1. Error diagnostics ..................................................................................................................................... 71
7.3.2.2. VR Blocking............................................................................................................................................. 71
7.3.2.3. VR Deliveries .......................................................................................................................................... 72
7.3.3. Journal info ...................................................................................................................................... 73
7.3.3.1. General journal ........................................................................................................................................ 74
7.3.3.2. Electronic Calibration journal................................................................................................................... 74
7.3.3.3. Function change journal .......................................................................................................................... 74
7.3.3.4. Unit price change journal......................................................................................................................... 75
7.3.3.5. Software Module change journal ............................................................................................................. 75
7.3.4. Dispenser Test ................................................................................................................................ 75
7.3.4.1. Test Delivery ........................................................................................................................................... 76
7.3.4.1.1. Test Delivery CSD setup.................................................................................................................... 76
7.3.4.1.1.1. Possible test deliverey data .......................................................................................................... 77
7.3.4.2. VR test .................................................................................................................................................... 77
7.3.4.2.1. Dry test .............................................................................................................................................. 78
7.3.4.2.2. Air Tightness ...................................................................................................................................... 78
7.3.4.2.3. Leak test ............................................................................................................................................ 79
7.3.4.2.4. TuV test ............................................................................................................................................. 79
7.3.4.3. Comm Board ........................................................................................................................................... 80
7.3.5. Backup ............................................................................................................................................. 80
7.3.5.1. Settings ................................................................................................................................................... 80
7.3.5.2. start Backup ............................................................................................................................................ 81
7.3.5.2.1. Backup progress ................................................................................................................................ 81
7.3.5.3. Format Card ............................................................................................................................................ 81
7.4. CONFIGURATION ....................................................................................................................................... 82
7.4.1. Dispenser info .................................................................................................................................. 82
7.4.2. Calculator info .................................................................................................................................. 83
7.4.2.1. Pre-Processor ......................................................................................................................................... 83
7.4.2.2. Communication Board ............................................................................................................................. 83
7.4.2.3. Pulser ...................................................................................................................................................... 84
7.4.2.4. VCC......................................................................................................................................................... 84
7.4.2.5. Display .................................................................................................................................................... 84
7.4.2.6. HYM ........................................................................................................................................................ 84
7.4.2.7. SIO .......................................................................................................................................................... 85
7.4.3. Software info .................................................................................................................................... 85
7.4.3.1. Kernel version ......................................................................................................................................... 85
7.4.3.2. Application Build ...................................................................................................................................... 86
7.4.3.3. Application module .................................................................................................................................. 86
7.4.3.4. Peripherals Modules................................................................................................................................ 86
7.4.3.5. VGA module ............................................................................................................................................ 87
7.4.4. Hydraulic .......................................................................................................................................... 87
7.4.4.1. Submerged.............................................................................................................................................. 87
7.4.4.2. Combined hose ....................................................................................................................................... 87
7.4.4.3. LPG ......................................................................................................................................................... 88
7.4.4.4. HS control ............................................................................................................................................... 88
7.4.4.5. Preset ...................................................................................................................................................... 89
7.4.4.5.1. Preset button mode............................................................................................................................ 90
7.4.4.6. Local Preset Input ................................................................................................................................... 90
7.4.4.7. Valve Error Control .................................................................................................................................. 92
7.4.5. Communication ................................................................................................................................ 92
7.4.5.1. CAN......................................................................................................................................................... 93
7.4.5.1.1. Auto configuration .............................................................................................................................. 93
7.4.5.1.2. Module init ......................................................................................................................................... 96
7.4.5.1.3. Module Status .................................................................................................................................... 96
7.4.5.2. Network ................................................................................................................................................... 97

Copyright  2015 Tokheim


TQC Service Manual V12.3 Page 5 of 226
7.4.5.3. Comm Board ........................................................................................................................................... 97
7.4.5.3.1. Node Address .................................................................................................................................... 97
7.4.5.3.2. Point to point ...................................................................................................................................... 98
7.4.5.4. IFSF ........................................................................................................................................................ 98
7.4.5.5. IFSF Configuration .................................................................................................................................. 99
7.4.5.6. IFSF Network .......................................................................................................................................... 99
7.4.5.6.1. IP-ADDRESSING............................................................................................................................... 99
7.4.5.7. Serial Port setup .................................................................................................................................... 100
7.4.6. Timer.............................................................................................................................................. 101
7.4.6.1. Maximum delivery timer ........................................................................................................................ 101
7.4.6.2. Max delivery timer low ........................................................................................................................... 101
7.4.6.2.1. Max delivery timer high .................................................................................................................... 101
7.4.6.3. Suspend timer ....................................................................................................................................... 101
7.4.6.4. Low no filling timer................................................................................................................................. 101
7.4.6.5. Inter-delivery timer................................................................................................................................. 101
7.4.6.6. Maximum time of no flow menu ............................................................................................................. 101
7.4.6.7. No action timer ...................................................................................................................................... 101
7.4.6.8. Wait preset button timer ........................................................................................................................ 101
7.4.6.9. Battery test timer ................................................................................................................................... 102
7.4.7. Fraud protection ............................................................................................................................ 102
7.4.8. Optional Functions ......................................................................................................................... 103
7.4.8.1. PIN Bypass ........................................................................................................................................... 103
7.4.8.2. Monitor Tank Level ................................................................................................................................ 103
7.4.8.3. Push to Start ......................................................................................................................................... 104
7.4.8.4. Product name display ............................................................................................................................ 104
7.4.8.5. Just stop ................................................................................................................................................ 104
7.4.8.6. Dispenser light ...................................................................................................................................... 105
7.4.8.7. Indication Light ...................................................................................................................................... 105
7.4.8.8. Idle Display............................................................................................................................................ 107
7.4.8.8.1. Idle display modes ........................................................................................................................... 108
7.4.8.9. Satellite ................................................................................................................................................. 109
7.4.8.10. Audio ..................................................................................................................................................... 109
7.4.8.11. Car at Pump .......................................................................................................................................... 110
7.4.8.12. Product Buzzer ...................................................................................................................................... 111
7.4.8.13. Flow Detection ...................................................................................................................................... 111
7.4.9. Prod configuration ......................................................................................................................... 112
7.4.10. Name tables ............................................................................................................................... 112
7.4.10.1. Product .................................................................................................................................................. 112
7.4.10.2. Fuel type ............................................................................................................................................... 113
7.4.10.3. Customer............................................................................................................................................... 113
7.4.11. Reserved .................................................................................................................................... 113
7.4.12. Reserved .................................................................................................................................... 113
7.4.13. Meter Calibration ........................................................................................................................ 114
7.4.14. Vapour recovery ......................................................................................................................... 115
7.4.14.1. Settings ................................................................................................................................................. 116
7.4.14.1.1. Hardware Mode ............................................................................................................................... 116
7.4.14.1.2. Communication Mode ...................................................................................................................... 116
7.4.14.1.3. Nozzle Config .................................................................................................................................. 117
7.4.14.1.4. VR Return per Product..................................................................................................................... 117
7.4.14.1.5. Efficiency ......................................................................................................................................... 117
7.4.14.1.6. Gaz Meter ........................................................................................................................................ 118
7.4.14.1.7. Calibration Parameters .................................................................................................................... 118
7.4.14.1.8. Error Parameters ............................................................................................................................. 118
7.4.14.2. Calibration ............................................................................................................................................. 119
7.4.15. Display Config ............................................................................................................................ 120
7.4.15.1. VGA configuration ................................................................................................................................. 120
7.4.15.2. VGA Parameters ................................................................................................................................... 120
7.4.15.3. Media Servers ....................................................................................................................................... 120
7.4.15.4. Backlight Switch .................................................................................................................................... 121
7.4.15.5. Backup Config ....................................................................................................................................... 121
7.4.15.6. On Screen Totals .................................................................................................................................. 121
7.4.16. PIN Code.................................................................................................................................... 122
7.4.17. Delivery Handling ....................................................................................................................... 122
7.5. SETUP .................................................................................................................................................... 123
7.5.1. Reset ............................................................................................................................................. 123
7.5.2. Software Update ............................................................................................................................ 124

Copyright  2015 Tokheim


TQC Service Manual V12.3 Page 6 of 226
7.5.2.1. Update package selection ..................................................................................................................... 124
7.5.2.2. Software update package handling ....................................................................................................... 124
7.5.2.3. Example of software update .................................................................................................................. 125
7.5.3. Restore .......................................................................................................................................... 125
7.5.4. System Setup ................................................................................................................................ 126
7.5.4.1. Date/Time Setup ................................................................................................................................... 127
7.5.4.2. Country Setup ....................................................................................................................................... 127
7.5.4.2.1. Rounding type .................................................................................................................................. 128
7.5.4.2.2. Display ............................................................................................................................................. 129
7.5.4.2.3. Pulser............................................................................................................................................... 129
7.5.4.2.4. Unit Setup ........................................................................................................................................ 130
7.5.4.2.5. Volume limit ..................................................................................................................................... 130
7.5.4.2.6. Hose expansion ............................................................................................................................... 130
7.5.4.2.7. Cents overshoot ............................................................................................................................... 131
7.5.4.2.8. Preset overshoot .............................................................................................................................. 131
7.5.4.2.9. Leak detection ................................................................................................................................. 131
7.5.4.2.10. Electronic calibration and temperature compensation ..................................................................... 132
7.5.4.2.11. Optional functions ............................................................................................................................ 133
7.5.4.2.11.1. Keylock / Calculator door lock ................................................................................................... 133
7.5.4.2.12. Lifetime Volume ............................................................................................................................... 134
7.5.4.2.13. Prod Density .................................................................................................................................... 135
7.5.4.2.14. Prod Coefficient ............................................................................................................................... 136
7.5.4.1. Volume Round off.................................................................................................................................. 136
7.5.4.2. Volume Calculate .................................................................................................................................. 136
7.5.4.3. Hydraulic Setup ..................................................................................................................................... 137
7.5.4.3.1. Hydraulic setup activation result ...................................................................................................... 137
7.5.4.3.2. HYM setup ....................................................................................................................................... 138
7.5.4.3.3. Pumps setup .................................................................................................................................... 138
7.5.4.3.3.1. Pump setup ................................................................................................................................. 138
7.5.4.3.4. VHS setup........................................................................................................................................ 139
7.5.4.3.5. Valve Type ....................................................................................................................................... 139
7.5.4.3.6. Product Selection ............................................................................................................................. 139
7.5.4.3.6.1. Dosing product selection ............................................................................................................. 140
7.5.4.3.7. Ratio Setup ...................................................................................................................................... 140
7.5.4.3.7.1. Dosing Ratio setup...................................................................................................................... 140
7.5.4.4. I/O Configuration ................................................................................................................................... 141
7.5.4.5. Dispenser ID ......................................................................................................................................... 141
7.5.4.6. Select Language ................................................................................................................................... 141
7.5.5. Communication .............................................................................................................................. 142
7.5.5.1.1. Volume Scaling ................................................................................................................................ 142
7.5.5.1.2. Volume & Amount size..................................................................................................................... 143
7.5.6. EMT Setup ..................................................................................................................................... 143
7.5.7. Meter Setup ................................................................................................................................... 144
7.5.8. Product Setup ................................................................................................................................ 144
7.5.9. System Access .............................................................................................................................. 144
7.5.9.1. Level W PIN CODe ............................................................................................................................... 145
7.5.9.2. Level 5 PIN code ................................................................................................................................... 145
7.5.9.3. Resume Def Code ................................................................................................................................. 145
7.5.9.4. Setup device ......................................................................................................................................... 146
7.5.9.5. Whitelist Update .................................................................................................................................... 146
7.6. W EIGHT & MEASURES ............................................................................................................................. 147
7.6.1. W &M Totals .................................................................................................................................. 147
7.6.1.1. W & M Pump Grand Totals ................................................................................................................... 148
7.6.2. W & M Read Transaction .............................................................................................................. 148
7.6.2.1. W & M Transaction details .................................................................................................................... 148
7.6.3. W & M Integrity Information ........................................................................................................... 149
7.6.4. W & M Delivery mode .................................................................................................................... 150
7.6.5. W & M Software Information.......................................................................................................... 150
7.6.6. W & M Product Coefficients and Densities .................................................................................... 150
7.6.7. W & M Fuel Types ......................................................................................................................... 151
7.6.8. W & M EC Factors ......................................................................................................................... 151
7.6.9. W&M Test Delivery ........................................................................................................................ 151
7.6.9.1. W&M Test Delivery CSD setup ............................................................................................................. 152
7.7. COLD-START ........................................................................................................................................... 153
7.7.1. Calculator Defaults: Mandatory Parameters ................................................................................. 153
7.7.2. TQC Cold start main menu ............................................................................................................ 154

Copyright  2015 Tokheim


TQC Service Manual V12.3 Page 7 of 226
7.7.3. Factory Cold start menu ................................................................................................................ 154
7.8. QUIT....................................................................................................................................................... 155
7.8.1. Cold start Quit ................................................................................................................................ 155
7.8.2. Warm start Quit ............................................................................................................................. 155
7.8.3. Resolve IO Re-configure problems ............................................................................................... 156
8. PROTOCOLS .............................................................................................................................................. 158
8.1. DART .................................................................................................................................................... 158
8.1.1. Communication transmission specifications .................................................................................. 158
8.1.2. TQC settings .................................................................................................................................. 158
8.1.3. Hardware settings .......................................................................................................................... 158
8.2. DUNCLARE.............................................................................................................................................. 159
8.2.1. Communication transmission specifications .................................................................................. 159
8.2.2. TQC settings .................................................................................................................................. 159
8.3. EIN ........................................................................................................................................................ 160
8.3.1. Communication transmission specifications .................................................................................. 160
8.3.2. TQC settings .................................................................................................................................. 160
8.4. EPS ....................................................................................................................................................... 161
8.4.1. Communication transmission specifications .................................................................................. 161
8.4.2. TQC settings .................................................................................................................................. 161
8.5. GILBARCO............................................................................................................................................... 162
8.5.1. Communication transmission specifications .................................................................................. 162
8.5.2. TQC settings .................................................................................................................................. 162
8.5.2.1. Hardware settings ................................................................................................................................. 162
8.6. KIENZLE.................................................................................................................................................. 163
8.6.1. Communication transmission specifications .................................................................................. 163
8.6.2. TQC settings .................................................................................................................................. 163
8.6.3. Hardware settings .......................................................................................................................... 163
8.7. LOGITRON............................................................................................................................................... 164
8.7.1. Communication transmission specifications .................................................................................. 164
8.7.2. TQC settings .................................................................................................................................. 164
8.8. IFSF/LON .............................................................................................................................................. 165
8.8.1. Communication transmission specifications .................................................................................. 165
8.8.2. TQC settings .................................................................................................................................. 165
8.9. IFSF/TCP-IP ......................................................................................................................................... 166
8.9.1. TQC settings .................................................................................................................................. 166
8.10. NUOVO PIGONE ................................................................................................................................... 167
8.10.1. Communication transmission specifications .............................................................................. 167
8.10.2. TQC settings .............................................................................................................................. 167
8.11. UDC/RS485 ...................................................................................................................................... 168
8.11.1. Communication transmission specifications .............................................................................. 168
8.11.2. TQC settings .............................................................................................................................. 168
8.11.3. Hardware settings ...................................................................................................................... 168
8.12. UDC................................................................................................................................................... 169
8.12.1. Communication transmission specifications .............................................................................. 169
8.12.2. TQC settings .............................................................................................................................. 169
8.13. ZSR ................................................................................................................................................... 170
8.13.1. Communication transmission specifications .............................................................................. 170
8.13.2. TQC settings .............................................................................................................................. 170
9. TROUBLESHOOTING ................................................................................................................................ 171
9.1. DISPLAY ERROR INFORMATION ................................................................................................................ 171
9.2. SHUTDOWN/RESTART TQC ..................................................................................................................... 171
9.3. REPLACING CAN PARTS ......................................................................................................................... 171
10. MOD IDS AND ERROR CODES ............................................................................................................. 172
10.1. MOD IDS ............................................................................................................................................. 172
10.2. ERROR CODES .................................................................................................................................... 174
10.2.1. General Error Codes 00-99 (Mod ID = 0) .................................................................................. 174
10.2.2. Software Module Specific Errors 100-999 (Mod ID = 0001–0999) ............................................ 175
10.2.3. Process Manager Errors (Mod ID = 10) ..................................................................................... 175

Copyright  2015 Tokheim


TQC Service Manual V12.3 Page 8 of 226
10.2.3.1. Configuration Manager (Mod ID = 11) or Configuration Handler Error (Mod ID = 22) ........................... 175
10.2.3.2. Database Manager Errors (Mod ID = 13) .............................................................................................. 175
10.2.3.3. File Transfer Manager Errors (Mod ID = 14) ......................................................................................... 176
10.2.3.4. IO Handler Errors (Mod ID 15) .............................................................................................................. 176
10.2.3.5. Filling Point Manager Errors (Mod ID = 51–54) ..................................................................................... 177
10.2.3.6. Hydraulic Manager Errors (Mod ID = 61–64) ........................................................................................ 181
10.2.3.7. Vapour Recovery Manager Errors (Mod ID = 71–74) ............................................................................ 182
10.2.3.8. Protocol Handler Errors (Mod ID = 90–94) ............................................................................................ 184
10.2.3.9. Display Handler Error (Mod ID = 110) ................................................................................................... 184
10.2.4. All Hardware Module Common Errors 00–99 (Mod ID = 1000–9999)....................................... 185
10.2.5. Hardware Module Specific Errors 100-999 (Mod ID = 1000–9999) .......................................... 185
10.2.5.1. Pre-Processor Module Error (Mod ID = 1200) ....................................................................................... 185
10.2.5.2. CAN Display Module Error (Mod ID = 1300–1307) ............................................................................... 185
10.2.5.3. Pulser Error (Mod ID = 1400–1415) ...................................................................................................... 186
10.2.5.4. HYM Board Error (Mod ID = 1500–1505) .............................................................................................. 186
10.2.5.5. VCC Board Error (Mod ID = 1600–1601) .............................................................................................. 186
10.2.5.6. Comm Board Error (Mod ID = 1700–1701) ........................................................................................... 188
10.2.5.7. Slave IO (SIO) Board Error (Mod ID = 1800–1803)............................................................................... 188
10.2.5.8. UI Module Errors (Mod ID = 2100–2103) .............................................................................................. 188
10.2.5.9. Keypad Board Error (Mod ID = 2200–2203) .......................................................................................... 189
10.2.5.10. Leak Detection Board Error (Mod ID = 2300)........................................................................................ 189
10.2.5.11. Keypad, Display and Printer (KDP) Board Error (Mod ID = 2400–2403) .............................................. 189
10.2.5.12. Card Reader Board Error (Mod ID = 2500–2503) ................................................................................. 189
11. TQC SPARE PART LIST ......................................................................................................................... 190
12. WIRING SCHEMATICS ........................................................................................................................... 195
12.1. TQC-LCD/VGA .................................................................................................................................. 195
13. SOME HYDRAULIC SETUPS ................................................................................................................. 199
13.1. SETUP NAME & HYM ASINGMENT RELATION .......................................................................................... 199
13.2. SCHEMATICS ....................................................................................................................................... 201
14. GPIO CONFIGURATION ......................................................................................................................... 223

Copyright  2015 Tokheim


TQC Service Manual V12.3 Page 9 of 226
1. INTRODUCTION
1.1.1. BACKGROUND
The objective of this document is to combine the product and the user interface information concerning the
Tokheim Quality Calculator (Board ID: TQC). The TQC is the most advanced brain of any dispenser. Using
common hardware and software it allows the user to manage a fuelling transaction for numerous specific
regional requirements. In the following chapters the TQC and its components are explained in more detail.

This document also describes the entire menu structure of a configuration device used to configure, maintain
and access data from the dispenser unit. To emphasize the user interaction the same menu structure is kept
within this document. When you enter the menu you can find more detailed information in the respective part of
the table of contents.

1.2. HEALTH & SAFETY


1.2.1. SAFETY CHECKLIST
• It is obligatory that this checklist be fully complied with during all work at the petrol station, particularly
construction or repair work;
• It is the duty of the contractor to ensure that all workers employed by him obey each and all of the relevant
laws, directives and other regulations.

Areas where special caution is required:

• The insides of tanks, tubes, dome shafts, filling shafts, change over shafts, vessels and dispensers;
• All areas in which fuel vapour is heavier than air can accumulate, e.g. fuel separator, draining shafts, low
located rooms, cellars, excavations, pipe trenches etc.;
• The areas around the outlets of tank ventilation pipes, especially during the filling phase;
• All areas near dispensers, tanker lorries and other vehicles while they are being tanked up, and particularly
when there is a lack of wind;
• A radius of 1.0 meters around petrol carrying pipes, as well as pipes that are not vapour free;
• All silt traps.

1.2.2. DUTIES OF THE EMPLOYEES


• To ensure optimal accident prevention in our company, in addition to the general rules applying to the
workers’ protection, it is necessary to take into account all the national protection of the workers legislation
and to actively support all measures which enhance safety standards;
• It is an employee’s duty to follow all company directives regarding the prevention of accidents, unless such
directives can be proved to be unfounded;
• Employees should not follow any instructions that go against safety standards;
• Employees are only permitted to use equipment for its original purpose, and this is defined by the company
alone;
• If an employee detects equipment that is deficient in terms of safety, he shall eliminate this deficiency
immediately. If such safety rectification is not part of his defined area of activities or if his knowledge is
insufficient to carry out such work he must immediately inform his superior about the detected safety
deficiency.

This applies equally to:


• Work materials which have not been correctly packed or correctly marked in order to meet the safety
requirements;
• Work methods or work processes which have not been correctly coordinated or controlled in order to meet
the safety requirements;
• Where dangerous activities are carried out by several persons the need for a permanent faultless
communication between them, in order to avoid dangerous events, shall require the appointing of one
person in order to carry out overall supervision.

Copyright  2015 Tokheim


TQC Service Manual V12.3 Page 10 of 226
1.2.3. HAZARDS
Prior to starting work, the dispenser must be isolated (i.e. entirely disconnected from the mains supply) and the
mains supply switch locked in the OFF position. The submerged pump (if applicable) and the control signals
from the dispenser must also be isolated. This is done to provide safety for the technician. As a further
precaution, switch off the main supply in the service station shop and place a clear notice on the switch to avoid
it being turned on again inadvertently.

WARNING: THE CONNECTION AND DISCONNECTION OF ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS MAY


ONLY BE CARRIED OUT BY QUALIFIED PERSONNEL AUTHORISED FOR SUCH ACTIVITIES.
WORK IN DANGEROUS AREAS MUST BE MADE SAFE BY OBSERVING ALL THE NATIONAL
SAFETY REQUIREMENTS IN FORCE.

ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS MAY ONLY BE CARRIED OUT BY QUALIFIED PERSONNEL AUTHORISED


FOR SUCH ACTIVITIES. WORK IN DANGEROUS AREAS MUST BE MADE SAFE BY OBSERVING ALL THE
NATIONAL SAFETY REQUIREMENTS IN FORCE.

It is not permitted to put a fuel dispenser into operation before an authorized official has inspected it and
released it. This depends upon the national regulations in force.

Dismantled packaging and cladding must be stored in such a way as to avoid damage to components or injuries
to persons. Covers that can be opened, such as the calculator housing, should be handled with care. Ensure
that the retaining catch is placed in the correct position to prevent the cover falling onto the head of the service
engineer or other persons in the area.

At unattended service stations, every end-user should be able to read the user instructions. They should be
visible on a notice board or integrated into the DIT and should be sufficiently well lit so that they can be read at
night.

At unattended service stations break away couplings must always be used to reduce the danger caused by a
motorist driving off with the nozzle still in the tank.

Copyright  2015 Tokheim


TQC Service Manual V12.3 Page 11 of 226
1.2.4. WARNING SIGNS
The following warning signs are fitted as a standard on the dispenser. However they may vary according to
individual country requirements or customer specifications.

Sign Meaning Position

Visible from both sides of the


Do not use mobile phones
dispenser

Naked flames and smoking Visible from both sides of the


forbidden dispenser

Visible from both sides of the


Do not spill fuel on the ground
dispenser

Visible from both sides of the


Stop the engine of a vehicle
dispenser

Visible from both sides of the


Trucks only
dispenser

Do not drive away with a nozzle in Visible from both sides of the
the tank dispenser

Copyright  2015 Tokheim


TQC Service Manual V12.3 Page 12 of 226
1.2.5. PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT

1.2.5.1. PROTECTIVE CLOTHING


The following clothing should be worn at all times during installation and maintenance procedures:

• Protective helmet
• Protective shoes (conductive)
• Protective gloves and/or protective hand cream
• Anti-static clothing
• Eye protection

1.2.5.2. SAFETY EQUIPMENT FOR WORKING IN HAZARDOUS AREAS


The following safety equipment is required for working in hazardous areas:

• Only spark free tools are permitted for work on dispensers.


• Work on bearings is only permitted using the standard workshop tools authorized for this kind of work.
• The use of all electrical tools is strictly prohibited.
• Only the use of explosion protected work lights is permitted.
• The use of telecommunications equipment in hazardous areas is strictly prohibited.

1.2.5.3. SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS


The following safety instructions must be adhered to during installation and maintenance procedures:

• Inhalation of petrol vapour must be avoided so suitable precaution must be taken and where necessary
respirators must be used.
• Avoid direct contact of fuel with the skin and avoid fuel spills.
• Use suitable protective clothing, protective gloves and/or protective hand cream.
• No smoking and no naked flames are permitted.
• Long hair and ties can get caught in moving parts so hair must be suitably covered.

1.2.6. THE ATEX DIRECTIVE


The ATEX Directive has introduced requirements for the safety of equipment when used in explosive
atmospheres throughout the European economic area. An explosive atmosphere exists where there is a mixture
of oxygen, a heat source and a fuel component. As a result we require, especially in the EU, to produce EX-i
products which can be proven with a valid ISO certificate, a valid quality assurance notification paper and with
the well-known CE labelling on products. See the ATEX label and the CE marking in Figure 1 and Figure 2.

For fuel dispensers these requirements apply to cable entry glands, junction boxes, magnetic switches, motors,
pulsers, solenoid coils and to vapour flow meter (VFM) zener barriers. A fuel dispenser is divided into hazardous
zones which indicate the level of potential explosive danger/risk. The hydraulic cabinet is regarded as a zone 1
(highest risk) due to the clear presence of fuel and heat. The area around this cabinet is seen as a zone 2 while
the electronic enclosure and its peripherals must be kept in a non-hazardous zone. All equipment and devices
have to comply with the safety level belonging to the zone in which they reside. Intrinsic safety equipment is a
safety example because it limits the energy of sparks and of temperatures.

Figure 1:The CE-marking Figure 2: The ATEX label

Copyright  2015 Tokheim


TQC Service Manual V12.3 Page 13 of 226
1.3. NOMENCLATURE
AC Alternating current
ADC Analog to digital conversion
ATEX Atmosphere explosive directive
CAN Controller area network
CE European conformity label
CPU Computer processor unit
CSD Customer sales display
DC Direct current
EC Electrical calibration
ECVR Electronic controlled vapour recovery
ECVR-OL ECVR- open loop
ECVR-SCS ECVR- self calibrated system
EIO European IO main board
ELU Energy limiting unit
EMT Electro-mechanical totalizer
EST European single and twin main board
EX-i ATEX intrinsic safety
PUMP Filling position
FPGA Field-programmable gate array, i.e. an integrated circuit
GPIO General-purpose input/output
HHT Hand held terminal
HS High speed
HW Hardware
HYM Hydraulic module
I/O Input/output
ICS Intertask communication and services
IrDA Infrared Data Association
ISO International organization for standardization
Kernel OS kernel used by Linux/Unix-based systems
LAN Local area network
LCD Liquid crystal display
LED Light emitting diode
LNO Logical nozzle number
MID Measuring instruments directive
MPC Magnetic pulser controller
MPL Magnetic pulser low end (MPC without temperature compensation)
NS Normal speed
NTC Negative temperature coefficient
OIML Organisation Internationale De Métrologie Légale
OL Open loop
OS Operating system
PCB Printed circuit board
POS Point of sale
PSI Power supply and IO board
PP Pre-processor module
PPE Personal protective equipment
PSU Power supply unit
RAM Random-access memory
RFID Radio frequency identification
RTC Real time clock
SBC Single board computer
SCS Self-calibrated system
SD Secure digital, i.e. a flash memory card format
SIO Slave IO board
SMPS Switched-mode power supply
SW Software
TC Temperature compensation
TCP/IP Transmission control/internet protocol
TQC Tokheim Quality Calculator
TQM Tokheim quality meter

Copyright  2015 Tokheim


TQC Service Manual V12.3 Page 14 of 226
UHS Ultra high speed
UPD Unit price display
USB Universal serial bus
UST Underground storage tank
VCC Vapour flow CAN controller
VFM Vapour flow meter
VGA Video graphics array
VHS Very high speed
VR Vapour recovery
W&M Weights and Measures

Copyright  2015 Tokheim


TQC Service Manual V12.3 Page 15 of 226
2. PRODUCT INFORMATION
2.1. TQC SYSTEM OVERVIEW
In order to understand the system’s main parts and functionality, this section provides an overview of all the
hardware components belonging to the TQC system. Besides pictures this chapter also includes diagrams to
clarify the main concepts of this system.

2.1.1. TQC WITH EIO BOARD


The EIO board is the main board which handles all main signals between all hardware components of the TQC
for the European market.
Figure 3 illustrates the top view of such a board. All the non-common I/Os are connected via the slave IO (SIO)
board to limit the basic configurations on board the EIO board.

CAN Display Ethernet Serial USB EMT-A/B ECVR VR

Power SD-card HYMs COMMS GPIO


Figure 3: EIO board

The main parts of this board are listed here below.

2.1.1.1. PIGGYBACK BOARDS AND DISPLAYS


The baseboard can be connected to the following boards:
• A processor board (See 0/p.22)
• A maximum of five hydraulic modules (See 2.1.6/p.23)
• One communication board (See 0/p.25)
• One slave IO board (See 2.1.11/p.35)

Each board can be connected on the EIO board by the means of on-board connectors. There are also two CAN
connectors combined with power for which respectively two displays can be connected. These connectors are
larger than the default CAN connector as extra power is supplied to the display.

2.1.1.2. FIELD-PROGRAMMABLE GATE ARRAY


An FPGA is an electronic component that is programmable in such a way that it enables the desired application
or functionality after manufacturing. On the baseboard it is responsible for the following:
• Powering the displays and the CAN bus
• Handling all the general purpose input/outputs: 8xGPIO and 8xGPI
• Driving the motor and the valves with respect to ECVR
• Routing the interrupts coming from the LAN and CAN interface to the processor board
• Controlling the power for all the main voltages and the battery: main fail/high/low and battery off/ok/low/test

Copyright  2015 Tokheim


TQC Service Manual V12.3 Page 16 of 226
With respect to power distribution of the main voltage the following voltage levels are created on the baseboard:

• 8V as input for the linear regulators and the HYMs


• 5V for the CAN transceivers and the processor board
• 3V3 for the FPGA, the pre-processor, the CAN interface, the Ethernet controller and the processor board
• 1V2 for the FPGA
• 24V for the GPIO

Note: Some hardware components require multiple voltage levels.

2.1.1.3. THE CAN-BUS


The controller area network bus is a bus standard designed to allow devices to communicate with one another
using a simple processor and a CAN controller. In a dispenser the CAN bus does this by connecting, via the IO
baseboard, all the calculator peripherals like the HYM boards, the pulsers, the VFM, the SIO board and the
displays. There is one free CAN connector onboard which is not categorized to a specific function yet. At this
moment it is the intention to connect either a SIO board or a VFM via this connector. Both circuitry boards are
explained in more detail later in this document.

Each connected device (Figure 4) is able to send and receive messages over the CAN bus system but only one
at a time is allowed to do so. A message consists primarily of an identifier which represents the priority of a
message. As long as the bus is idle every device is allowed to transmit. If two devices want to communicate at
the same time the less dominant one stops its transmission. Using this identifier devices also know which
connected device the messages on the CAN bus are intended for.

In terms of practice we strongly recommend a maximum CAN cable length of 40 meters to avoid problems in
the field. An example in which the cable length could be troublesome is in satellite display connections.

Remark: Any free CAN Connector MUST be fitted with a CAN-terminator.

Figure 4: CAN bus topology

2.1.1.4. GENERAL PURPOSE CONNECTORS


A GPIO pin is a generic, serial pin on the baseboard whose behaviour can be controlled by software. Each pin
can be configured as an input or an output. On the baseboard there are 4 connectors each of which has 8 GPI
pins and 8 GPIO pins. To streamline all possibilities several setups are made so that all the IO functions are
almost fully physically assigned to the EIO board. In this case the slave IO board with the additional
inputs/outputs is not required. For a complete overview of all the implemented setups refer to document 943757
on the Euro Engineering website or later in this document.

Using these connectors a preset keypad (Figure 5) can be directly connected to the EIO baseboard. The preset
functionality is used when the customer wants a predefined amount or volume at a dispenser.

Figure 5: Preset keypad

Copyright  2015 Tokheim


TQC Service Manual V12.3 Page 17 of 226
2.1.1.5. PULSER, PRE-PROCESSOR AND VAPOUR RECOVERY CIRCUITRY
On the right upper side of the baseboard you have one Electronic Controlled Vapour Recovery (ECVR) motor
output and one output to control a maximum of two proportional gas valves. To drive these outputs the
baseboard requires proper ECVR circuitry.

Next to the ECVR connectors there is also one connector for the Gallus meter. This calibrated meter is used
during the calibration process in case of the ECVR open loop variant. The integrated pulser pre-processor is
used to control the interface of the Gallus meter.

2.1.1.6. OTHER COMMUNICATION INTERFACES


Besides the CAN interface for the displays/peripherals and the Infrared Data Association (IrDA) interface the
baseboard also has the following interfaces:
• An Ethernet connection (Figure 6) can be used for:
o Communication with POS systems using IFSF over Ethernet or TCP/IP, if supported, and with the
media server in case of the TQC-VGA, if installed;
o Diagnostics for service and/or engineering;
o Accessing and collecting logs;
o Remote software upgrade, if implemented.
• A USB interface (Figure 7) to connect external devices:
o Note that no device may be inserted for charging purposes as this can make the TQC unstable.
• An external memory interface for an secure digital (SD) card (Figure 8) possibly used for:
o Software download and upgrade, if implemented;
o Configuration store/restore;
o Auto backup;
o The possibility of transferring the SD card to a new TQC without the need to set up the dispenser.
• One serial RS232 interface (Figure 9) to control, for example, the mini-master.
• An I2S or an I2C interface (Figure 10) for AC97 audio and if not implemented it can be used to supply a
24VDC for an optional Ethernet switch or a mini-master (See VR Mini-Master 2.1.8.3/p.27).

Note that there is only one Ethernet cable going from the POS system to the dispenser. If more than one
Ethernet connection is needed an Ethernet switch (Figure 11) is installed in the calculator head.

Figure 8: SD card
Figure 6: Ethernet connection Figure 7: USB interface
interface

Figure 9: RS232 interface Figure 10: I2S/ I2C interface Figure 11: Ethernet switch

Copyright  2015 Tokheim


TQC Service Manual V12.3 Page 18 of 226
2.1.2. ELECTROMECHANICAL TOTALIZER
From the W&M regulations it is mandatory to keep a record of volumes provided for each product. Like the
counter of a residential watt-hour meter the EMT stores all litres/gallons. Where in past dispensers all values
needed to be read out from mechanical totalizers it is now possible to do so from a simple counter. To ensure
the EMT is connected a current of 15mA is measured when the counter is powered.

It is possible to have an EMT (Figure 12) per product or per nozzle. The current EMT device can handle a
maximum of 600 pulses per minute which has an impact on the resolution of the totalized values. The higher
this value, the smaller the volume that can be stored. As shown in Figure 13 and Figure 14 the EIO has two
EMT connectors and the EST board has one.

Figure 12: EMT

Figure 13: EIO EMT connections Figure 14: EST EMT connection

2.1.3. MAGNETIC PULSERS


Behind one nozzle there is a minimum of one meter which measures the amount of fuel coming from the
pumping unit to the nozzle. To be able to measure this amount a meter requires a pulser to convert mechanical
information into electronic pulses. These pulses are sent through a CAN Connection to the HYM board so that
the TQC is able to control other peripherals such as the display, the VR system or the POS system. Since the
pulser handles sensitive information all access and all communications have to be tampered-proof.

In general there are two types of pulsers of which only one is able to provide temperature compensation.
The MPL pulser (Figure 15) and the more intelligent MPC pulser with a PT-100 interface for the temperature
sensor (Figure 16).

Figure 15: MPL V5 Figure 16: MPC V5 with PT-100 connectors

Copyright  2015 Tokheim


TQC Service Manual V12.3 Page 19 of 226
2.1.3.1. TEMPERATURE COMPENSATION
This functionality has been designed to compensate for differences in fuel deliveries caused by a variation in
fuel temperature. If the temperature increases the fuel expands accordingly which would allow a lower volume
to be extracted by the consumer at the same price. In contrast, the station owner could experience a
disadvantage at a lower temperature.

The TC functionality requires a temperature probe or a thermo-sensor to measure the temperature of the
fuel inside the meter in real-time (Figure 17) The software in the pulser compares this temperature with the
nominal temperature of 15°C. If there is a difference the pulser adjusts the measured fuel quantity using a
compensation algorithm. This algorithm is based upon fixed product density values and fixed thermal
expansion product coefficient values provided by the official bodies.

Figure 17: PT-100

2.1.3.2. ELECTRONIC CALIBRATION


The Electronic Calibration (EC) functionality is performed by the magnetic pulser using software only. This
software calibrates the meters by means of an electronic correction factor, called the K-factor, to eliminate the
expected meter drift over time. This drift is probably caused by the mechanical calibration done via adjustment
screws.

This electronic correction factor is a global factor applicable for all flow rates and all fuel types. This parameter is
preset in the factory during a calibration session with the highest flow rate only. It is permanently stored in the
pulser but it can also be modified manually if required. Note that the EC is used for only one meter since a
pulser is physically linked to one specific meter.

The calibration process determines the deviation between the displayed volume of the TQC and the can volume
using a calibrated can by W&M. To avoid time-consuming calculations a lookup table is used to select the K-
factor which corresponds to the percentage of the found deviation. At the end this factor is stored in the TQC so
that it can be applied in following transactions. As soon as a dispenser is installed in the field this process is
done on a regular basis due to legal restrictions.

Copyright  2015 Tokheim


TQC Service Manual V12.3 Page 20 of 226
2.1.4. TQC-EST BOARD
Like the EIO board the European single twin board also handles all the main signals between all hardware
components of the TQC. There are, however, some differences. Looking at the top view shown in Figure 18 the
most noticeable difference is the absence of connectors for the HYM boards and communication board.
Compared to the EIO board this board also has the following characteristics:
• A limited set of hydraulic configurations;
• A maximum of three valves per product;
• No support for vapour recovery and no RS232 port is available.

CAN Displays Ethernet USB EMTs

Power SD-card 2 Integrated HYMs Figure 18 EIO board COMMS GPIO

Copyright  2015 Tokheim


TQC Service Manual V12.3 Page 21 of 226
2.1.5. PROCESSOR BOARDS
The processor board is the central part of the TQC. It runs the Linux operating system, the file system and all
the device drivers which are required to run TQC applications. In addition it handles the initialization of the TQC
system.

2.1.5.1. ARM PROCESSOR BOARD


As the name suggests, the onboard processor is an ARM9 AT91RM9200. It holds 64 MB SDRAM and 96 MB
flash memory which are respectively extendable to 128 and 192 MB. These memories are used to run the
operating system and the applications. In addition the APB, (
Figure 19) contains a battery backup real-time clock, a temperature sensor and a serial number chip.

The power levels 3V3 and 1V8, regulated by the FPGA, are generated onboard by linear voltage regulators.

Micro-controller (ARM9) Reset button TQC Dip switches for:


(Version L2 and lower) • Enable/disable
(version L2 and lower)
• Programming mode

RTC battery

Status LEDs during normal operation:


• Power = on • Program = off Flash memory
• Normal = on • Activity = flashing

Figure 19: ARM PCB board

Note: In the first version of this board, the reset button cannot be used because it results in a corrupt flash
procedure. In the following versions this button is removed.

Copyright  2015 Tokheim


TQC Service Manual V12.3 Page 22 of 226
2.1.5.2. SITARA PROCESSOR BOARD
In the next generation of the processor board the Cortex A8 processor is chosen due to its extended capabilities.
The SITARA board (
Figure 20) holds the following key differences compared to its predecessor:
• Higher clock frequency: 600 MHz instead of 180 MHz
• Faster type of memory: 512 MB NAND instead of 96 MB NOR flash
• More volatile memory: 128 MB instead of 64 MB DDR2 RAM
• Capability to store transaction data by a battery backup SRAM
• More recent Linux kernel version: v3.2 instead of v2.4

Micro-controller (Cortex A8) Flash memory RTC battery

Status LEDs during normal operation:


• Power = on • Activity = flashing
Ctrl = off
Figure 20: Sitara board

2.1.6. HYDRAULIC MODULES


The HYM board is an interface between the processor board via the CAN bus and the devices to which it is
connected. These devices are located in the hydraulic area so its connections on the HYM need to be
intrinsically safe. Each HYM board handles the communication with devices like the valves, the motor, the CAN
pulsers and the nozzles.

Throughout the different versions of the HYM board several key elements are improved:
• Efficiency by continuously improving the entire board design and by regulating the voltage levels;
• Functionality of some components;
• Protection by making the over- and Under-current of all outputs more effective;
• Performance of the board by, among others, changing to a more powerful processor;
• Serviceability by supporting software downloads and at a later stage allowing remote diagnostics.

The latest HYM boards mainly improve the support of proportional valves further. A regular valve is a device
that regulates the flow of a fluid by only opening and closing the passageway. However a proportional valve is
also able to partially obstruct the passing fluid by regulating the amount of current going through it.

On top of each board there are two switches which enable or disable the electronic calibration of the TQM or
the temperature compensation by the pulser. After assembly these are sealed to exclude tampering.
Switch inputs SA and SB are now connected to the same input as the In System Programming (ISP).
When ISP is needed switches SA and SB must be in the ‘Open’ position.

Copyright  2015 Tokheim


TQC Service Manual V12.3 Page 23 of 226
2.1.6.1. HYM CURRENT DETECTION VALUES
Connected device Over-current (mA) Under-current (mA)
Pulser 300 N.A. These values are valid from the latest HYM3
Valve 400 9 to HYM 7 and can fluctuate with 10%.
Motor 600 9

Sealing switch for EC and TC, depending on software


Side A (SA) Side B (SB)

Pulser side A / Pulser side B /


Master Slave

Motor

Nozzle side A / Processor


Master

Motor ON LED Nozzle side B /


Slave

Valves side A / Valves ON


Master power LEDs

HYM activity Valves side B /


LED, flashing in Slave
normal operation
Valve side A / Valve side B /
Master 40/80 or Master 40/80 or
Vapour return Vapour return
per product per product
Figure 21: HYM 9 Figure 22: HYM 7

Currently all HYM boards support two nozzle switches, two CAN pulsers, six valves and one motor relay.
Behind the motor connector an over- and Under-current circuitry shuts down the power (24V) to the motor within
10 ms after detection. The valves are split in an A side and a B side on which every side is also able to
disconnect the power (24V) within 10 ms in case an over- or Under-current is detected.
There is however a common over-current protection for both pulsers. When an Over-current is detected by the
microcontroller it switches both pulsers off within 15 ms to prevent damage to the hardware.

Copyright  2015 Tokheim


TQC Service Manual V12.3 Page 24 of 226
2.1.7. TQC COMMUNICATION BOARDS
The TQC communication board is a CAN device which handles the entire communication with the POS system.
This board must be connected using the COMMS connector to the IO baseboard. It is the same connector on
which the hydraulic boards are connected. The onboard CAN controller translates the CAN messages into
messages supported by the POS interface. It also handles all the time critical aspects of the protocol supported
by the communication board.

In the market there are several different POS systems active where each system supports its own type of
communication protocol. As a result Tokheim developed several communication boards, depending on the
protocol board it can be used for one or more protocols (See 8/p.158)

Figure 23: TQC-LON Figure 24: LON V4

Figure 25: Tokheim communication Figure 26: ZSR

Figure 27:TQC-EIN Figure 28: TQC-EPS

Figure 29: TQC-DART Figure 30: TQC-MTT

Figure 31: TQC-Logitron

Copyright  2015 Tokheim


TQC Service Manual V12.3 Page 25 of 226
2.1.8. VAPOUR RECOVERY
In some countries it is mandatory by law to recover the vapours of fuels which are thinner than air in order to
prevent it escaping into the atmosphere. It reduces the risk of health contamination by breathing in the vapours
and potentially minimizes the explosive risk.

The vapour recovery system is integrated into the calculator so that the process can be electronically controlled,
hence the name ECVR. It can handle the VR for 1 nozzle per side. In addition it controls one motor driving the
VR pumps and two proportional valves controlling the vapour flow. There are two variants of vapour recovery
which can be selected:
• The Open Loop system (OL) or ECVR-OL where the system is calibrated with an external Gallus meter;
• The Self Calibrated System or ECVR-SCS where a VFM and a zener barrier are added to measure and
continuously recalibrate the vapour flow.

Note: An OL-system can be upgraded to an SCS system by adding these two main components. The benefit of
a self-calibrated system is that it keeps the VR system 100% efficient.

2.1.8.1. VAPOUR RECOVERY METER


When filling up a car tank a negative pressure is created with the result that the vapour withdraws out of the
tank. This vapour is then absorbed through the nozzle so that it goes back into the underground tank. The VFM
measures the actual vapour flow that is recovered from the car fuel tank during a delivery. The vapour flow CAN
controller (VCC) board on top of the VFM delivers real-time vapour flow and pressure data via the CAN bus to
the calculator. Figure 32 illustrates a VFM with a VCC board on top.

Figure 32: Vapour flow meter

The circuit gets flow information via a bridge sensor which gives an AC output. The frequency of this output is
proportional to the vapour flow going through the VFM. This signal is sent through an amplifier, a band-pass
filter and finally through a self-correlating filter. The microcontroller measures the frequency of this signal and
converts it into actual flow information. Because this flow information is measured at a pressure lower than
ambient, the flow needs to be corrected by the head loss of the nozzle and the piping. For this a second
pressure sensor is present that interfaces directly to the AD converter.

The microcontroller gets the pressure information from the AD converter and converts this into actual pressure
information. From the flow and pressure information, the corrected gas flow and thus the past volume can be
calculated. The microcontroller is also capable of detecting a damaged sensor or flex cable or sensor.

Remark: This is an ATEX approved part which is not field serviceable so DO NOT REPAIR IT IN THE FIELD! It
must be fully replaced.

Copyright  2015 Tokheim


TQC Service Manual V12.3 Page 26 of 226
2.1.8.2. ENERGY LIMITING UNIT
Nowadays electronics are indispensable within a dispenser unit. Since the hydraulic area has a potentially
explosive atmosphere the electronics within have to comply with the ATEX safety rules. As a result all signals
and power heading to this area have to be controlled and limited. With this in mind the TQC energy limiting unit
(ELU) forms such an EX-i safety barrier between the calculator and the electronics in the hydraulic area.
CAN Bus Input CAN Bus Output

Status LEDS:
• Red: CAN bus
communication
• Green: VFM
communication
• Yellow: Power out

To the VFM (intrinsically safe)


Figure 33: Energy limiting unit (ELU)

Behind the connector X3 in Figure 33 there are several protection mechanisms in place, like opto-isolator and
Schmitt triggers. As a result this connector is allowed to physically connect the VFM within the dispenser with
the CAN bus. There are two other (non-EX-i) connectors X1 and X2 which provide the actual CAN bus access.
They are able to maintain the single-line bus structure as follows. The CAN input X1 is used to power the board
while the CAN output X2 is used to feed the 24 voltage level to the next peripheral. In this case the ELU acts as
a normal CAN device of the TQC. However when the VFM is not connected to the ELU then the voltage from
the connector X1 appears directly at the output connector X2. Here the barrier is not considered to be a CAN
device.

To limit the energy towards the VFM without compromising its performance two zener barriers are implemented.
To handle common mistakes, the current limit is made lower than the value of the safety fuses. This means that
the fuses will only blow when there is an exceptional energy present (like damage by lightning) at the calculator
side and not by a short-circuit in the Exi protected circuit.

Remark: This is an ATEX approved part which is not field serviceable so DO NOT REPAIR IN THE FIELD! It
must be fully replaced.

2.1.8.3. VR MINI-MASTER
The TQC can also perform VR monitoring functions on the ECVR-SCS system so that the TQC can block the
product which has a failing VR system. In some dispenser-POS protocols, like IFSF over Ethernet, the POS
system is informed about the status of the VR system. For protocols that do not support these VR messages,
usually the older ones, Tokheim offers an additional monitor. The VR mini-master (Figure 34) is connected on
the IO baseboard using the RS232 connector and converts signals to the RS485 link. It is able to show the
system status using onboard LEDs or to forward it to the connected POS system. The protocol used for this VR
monitoring is the DVRC2 protocol.
Note that in the ECVR-OL mode this information is not available.

Figure 34: VR mini-master

Copyright  2015 Tokheim


TQC Service Manual V12.3 Page 27 of 226
2.1.9. TQC-LCD
The customer price display (CSD) board is used to display the total amount, the volume and the product price(s)
to the user while the dispenser is providing fuel. This board is connected to the TQC using the CAN bus though
which such information is communicated. On the IO-baseboard a maximum of two displays can be connected.
Since this board is a standard module it must hold certain global functionalities like the following:
• IRDA interface on the board for configuring the TQC by means of, for example, a handheld terminal
• CAN interface to communicate with the IO-baseboard
• One bi-colour LED visible for customer/station owner (for example, for ECVR error LED)
• Range of 1 to 4 unit price displays with each UPD having a separate part number;
• Integrated white LED backlight which can be switched on/off for each display individually (for example, in
case the battery backup supplies the energy for the TQC)
• DOT symbol with a sole purpose to show the comma position

Figure 35 illustrates a fully equipped TQC-CSD board with four UPDs and one jumper to select the amount of
UPDs. The jumper is used to select which register sends its shifted data back to the microcontroller for
verification. In this perspective only one jumper may be inserted on the board but be aware that it has to match
the software configuration. If it does not match, the unit price can be displayed on the wrong position.

IRDA transceiver Amount/volume display VR error LED

Jumper selection from left to right:


• W300: 1 UPD;
• W301: 2 UPDs;
• W302: 3 UPDs;
• W303: 4 UPDs.
Figure 35: TQC-CSD3

The display shown in Figure 35 is a 664 display, for some countries 775 displays are being used.
In this TQC version no additional configuration has to be made according to the used displays,
See table below to explain number reference.

Data 664 display 775 display


Amount 6 digits 7 digits
Volume 6 digits 7 digits
Unit price 4 digits 5 digits

2.1.9.1. POWER SUPPLY UNIT


The PSU (Figure 36) is a standard module of the TQC with the following global functionalities:

• Capable of driving all configurations of the TQC in India, China and Europe (including the 24V coils in
European dispensers), with the exception of the printer.
• It can be connected on the main electrical lines with a 90-300VAC input range on a frequency between 45
and 65 Hz.
• An output of 24VDC and 5A which is protected by a short circuit. The other voltages are generated locally
on the peripherals or the processor board.
• It handles the power down request from the TQC and provides a main fail and main low signal.
• An onboard charge circuitry for batteries with a possible support for different batteries.
When the battery is low the battery test circuitry sends a low output signal to the TQC.
• Contains filters to protect and to regulate peak voltages in the input/output of the TQC system.

Copyright  2015 Tokheim


TQC Service Manual V12.3 Page 28 of 226
LED: main preset LED: charge ON

Charge voltage
adjustment
20V6 at 25°C

Main in from the Jumper W302:


transformer Open: 0,25 A (1,2 Ah)
Closed: 1,25 A (≥3 Ah)
Default = closed

Fuse 6A3 for LED: Power OK.


the battery

Battery backup Output to the TQC of 24VDC at 5A


Figure 36: Power supply unit and the transformer

In this PSU version there is also an additional, external transformer which converts the input voltage to a lower
25VAC voltage.

Note: Be sure to check jumper W302 (Figure 36) as not placing it can result in a never charged battery.

When open the charge current is limited to 0,25 A for batteries with a capacity of ≤1,2 Ah.
When closed the charge current is limited to 1,25 A for batteries with a capacity of ≥3 Ah.

2.1.9.1.1. BATTERY BACK-UP


There are two batteries, one of 6V and another of 12V output (Figure 37) These batteries are only used as a
backup system for the TQC in case the main power shuts down and/or fails. This system has to supply enough
energy to the TQC system so that it is able to finish the last delivery transaction. In addition all the transfer data,
like the totals, must be stored in the TQC RAM/flash memory and sent to the connected POS.

Figure 37: TQC-LCD batteries


2.1.9.2. CABLING OVERVIEW OF THE TQC-LCD
Section 12.1 on page 195 in this document contains a detailed view which gives an overview of the TQC-board
and the cabling.
Note: always check for the latest revision on EuroEng 943366.

Copyright  2015 Tokheim


TQC Service Manual V12.3 Page 29 of 226
2.1.10. TQC-VGA
In order to understand the system’s main parts and functionality, this section provides an overview of all the
hardware components belonging to the TQC-VGA system. Besides pictures this chapter also includes diagrams
to clarify the main concepts of this system.

2.1.10.1.SINGLE BOARD COMPUTER


Inputs & outputs LVDS connectors
(USB, RJ45) for LCD side B
Speakers output SODIMM DDR2
connector memory
CPU & cool fan

LVDS connectors Power supply


for LCD side A connector coming
from PSU
Figure 38: ‘Avalue’ SBC (24VDC)

The SBC is an electronic device (mini-computer) used for interfacing the VGA system along with the TQC. This
is the heart of the VGA system. Figure 38 shows an SBC of the brand ‘Avalue’.

The SBC is connected via an ethernet cable to the TQC. The USB connections on the SBC can be used for
several options; these are explained in the following paragraphs and chapters.

2.1.10.2.POWER SUPPLY UNIT


The PSU (Figure 39) for the TQC-VGA is almost the same as for the TQC-LCD; the only difference is that there
is a connector for connecting an NTC thermistor. The NTC (Figure 40) measures the temperature of the
batteries, to control the charging voltage for the best charging conditions for the batteries. There are 3 batteries
of 6V each. The transformer (Figure 41) is used for converting the 230VAC voltage to a lower 25VAC voltage.
The transformer has a power of 225VA.
Connector for NTC

Figure 39: Figure 40: Figure 41:


Power supply unit External temperature sensor TQC-VGA transformer

Copyright  2015 Tokheim


TQC Service Manual V12.3 Page 30 of 226
2.1.10.2.1. BATTERY BACKUP
There are three batteries of 6V each (Figure 42). These batteries are only used as a backup system for the TQC
in case the main power shuts down and/or fails. This system has to supply enough energy to the TQC-VGA
system so that it is able to finish the last delivery transaction. In addition all the transfer data, like the totals,
must be stored to the TQC RAM/flash memory and sent to the connected POS.

Figure 42: Battery backup


2.1.10.2.2. IO BOARD
The main function of the IO (PSI) board is to convert the +24VDC input voltage into +12VDC. It also distributes
power and inputs/outputs between the VGA-PSU, VGA screens and speakers.
Another functionality of the PSI board is display backlight switching, using the I/O output from the ‘Avalue’-SBC.

Power supply LED H1 power OK


connector coming Power supply
from PSU (24VDC) connector for SBC
Connector for Ethernet (12VDC)
switch/ Fafnir Connector for
converter (24VDC) speakers coming from
SBC
Digital input connector Power supply
coming from SBC connector for LCD
Power supply side B (12/24VDC,
connector for LCD speakers)
side A (12/24VDC,
speakers)

Figure 43 PSI board

Copyright  2015 Tokheim


TQC Service Manual V12.3 Page 31 of 226
2.1.10.3.DISPLAY AND SPEAKERS
A TFT-LCD is a variant of liquid crystal display (LCD) which uses Thin Film Transistor (TFT) technology to
improve image, colour and quality. The display is a 17-inch TFT with 1280x1024 pixels.

IR sensor board
VGA display
(See 0/p.34)

Speakers

Figure 44: TQC-VGA display

2.1.10.3.1. SCREEN LAYOUT

2 11

3 10

4 9

5 8

6 7
Figure 45: Screen layout

Copyright  2015 Tokheim


TQC Service Manual V12.3 Page 32 of 226
Description
1 Advertisement area.
Media files from advert_idle and advert_fuel are played here.
This area is fully overlapped by the Error [1/2].jpg file from livery in case an error occurs.
2 Current product.
The picture displayed here is based on the logical nozzle number (LNO) given by the TQC.
Note: The nozzle number is used, not the product code.
The logo and product name are part of the product picture (product Bottom [A/B][1-5] GIF files
in livery, where A/B stands for side, 1-5 stands for nozzle number). Can be an animated GIF
file. Animation is restarted when the nozzle is used.
In the event of an error state, this background is replaced by TqcError.gif file in livery (should
be red with an error text). Can be an animated GIF file.
3 Pump number (pump symbol is part of the product picture).
The number is send by the TQC.
4 Unit price unit.
5 Price per volume sign. This is part of product picture file in livery.
6 Software version, livery version and number of blacklisted media files.
The number of blacklisted files is updated dynamically when media files cannot be played.
7 Tokheim logo. This is part of the product picture.
8 Temperature and minimum dispensing volume. These texts are part of Background.jpg file in
livery. (It is controlled and sent by TQC.)
9 Vapour recovery status.
This is the picture file VRLed[0-3].gif from livery, where 0=OK, 1=WARNING, 2=ERROR,
3=OFF (picture should be empty in this case).
10 Volume, amount and error codes.
(Values and comma position are sent by the TQC.)
The background colour is defined in the default.html file in livery (change dynamically to black
and white during OIML test sequence).
11 Volume and amount sign. This is part of product picture file in livery.

When on screen totals are shown the display will look like Figure 46.

Advert Layout (totals per product) Advert Layout (totals per side)
Figure 46: On screen totals

Copyright  2015 Tokheim


TQC Service Manual V12.3 Page 33 of 226
2.1.10.3.2. IR SENSOR BOARD
The IR sensor board (Figure 47) contains an IrDA transceiver which is used for communication between the
HHT and the TQC via an infrared signal.

Figure 47: TQC-IRC board


2.1.10.4.ADVERTISEMENT MEDIA FILES
Advertisement files are the responsibility of our customers, which can freely update media files on their
dispensers.

During media file transfer, TQC-VGA checks that the size of the file is not greater than the available space in the
compact flash, the TQC-VGA tries to play any downloaded media file with a supported extension.

The content is managed as a slide show, updates can be done using T-media or a USB stick plugged into the
TQC-VGA.
Figure 48 shows how to set up your USB stick with the supported folder structure.

Folders on USB stick Advert_fuel folder Advert_idle folder


Figure 48: USB stick structure

In the folder you can place the files which will be displayed while fueling.
There can be videos or pictures in this folder.

In the folder you can place the files which will be displayed while the dispenser is in idle state.
This also can be videos or pictures. The advert_idle folder can contain a special file named “thanks” (with any
supported extension). This file is played each time a fuelling is finished.

The following file types are supported:


• Pictures: BMP, JPG (colour definition RBG), PNG, GIF (both animated and not animated).
• Videos: MPG, AVI, WMV, MOV (can increase CPU load, advised to convert to WMV).
• Resolution: 1280 x 720 (16:9)
• Frame rate: 25 frames per second
• Bit rate: 1200 kbps
• Max file size: 250 Mb per side, 30 Mb per file
• Max playing time: 5 minutes
• Default slide time: 5 seconds

Any file with an unsupported extension will be ignored. Supported video formats depend on installed video
codec and versions. Test the video for their compatibility with installed codec pack and if they don’t cause a to
large CPU load.

Copyright  2015 Tokheim


TQC Service Manual V12.3 Page 34 of 226
A USB stick can be used for file download and upload depending on the existing folders in the USB stick root
directory (for example, E:\).
E:\Exe\ Should contain TQC-VGA software to be downloaded.
Authenticity and integrity is checked before transfer.
E:\Xmlfiles\ Should contain TQC-VGA XML files to be downloaded.
Authenticity and integrity is checked before transfer.
E:\Livery\ Should contain the TQC-VGA livery folder to be downloaded.
Authenticity and integrity is checked before transfer.
E:\Products\ Should contain TQC-VGA product pictures to be downloaded.
E:\Advert_idle\ Should contain the advertising media file for the idle state to be downloaded.
E:\Advert_fuel\ Should contain the advertising media file for the fuelling state to be downloaded.
E:\Vgalog\ Used to upload TQC-VGA debug logging files for both PUMPs to the USB stick.

2.1.10.5.CABLING OVERVIEW OF THE TQC-VGA


Section 12.1 on page 195 in this document contains a detailed view which gives an overview of the TQC-board
and the cabling.
Note: always check for the latest revision on EuroEng 943366.

2.1.11. SLAVE IO BOARD


The SIO board (Figure 49) is made to move all the options, which are less common, from the IO baseboard. It is
connected to the IO baseboard using the CAN connector. It will support:
• Additional preset keypads (a maximum of 20 keys) for two sides
• General purpose connectors: 8 GPOs and 24 GPIs
• Two fleet interfaces for both sides (volume, amount, request, authorize)
• Auxiliary motor output

Activity LED: flashing


Preset keypads CAN out CAN in Power on LED Fleet interface
in normal operation

24 general-purpose inputs Auxiliary motor 8 general-purpose Power switch/


output with LED outputs jumpers: external or
internal
Figure 49: Slave IO board

Copyright  2015 Tokheim


TQC Service Manual V12.3 Page 35 of 226
2.1.11.1.POWER DISTRIBUTION
The SIO board is powered via the CAN bus with a 24VDC level from which several other voltage levels are
derived. The following voltage levels are present:
• 24VDC required for the general purpose inputs/outputs, the opto-isolated outputs of the fleet interfaces
when no external power is available, the output of the CAN bus and for the auxiliary motor output
• 5VDC for the CAN driver
• 3.3VDC to power the microcontroller and the logic
• 1.8VDC to power the microcontroller core

2.1.11.2.ADDITIONAL PRESET INTERFACE


On the SIO board there is one connector that supports two preset keypads with a maximum of 20 keys each.

2.1.11.3.GENERAL PURPOSE CONNECTORS


There are 8 GPOs and 24 GPIs available so that all additional, possible options and configuration can be
supported. The 32 pins are connected with the 24VDC power, providing a maximum of 1A for all outputs. All
signals are level shifted and filtered to suppress spikes. These signals are controlled by a shift register via a
serial interface from the microcontroller.

2.1.11.4.FLEET INTERFACE
The SIO board is equipped with an opto-isolated pulse interface to supply pulses to a fleet POS system for
volume and amount information. Additional signals are also provided to receive an authorized release and to
send a request for release.
All the signals are opto-isolated to ensure the galvanic separation from the POS system.
The isolated circuitry can also be powered externally besides being powered by the SIO itself.
This is done by closing the switch/jumpers on the board (Figure 49).

2.1.11.5.AUXILIARY MOTOR OUTPUT


In certain hydraulic setups the dispenser requires an additional motor, there for the SIO board is equipped with
a motor output.
In such cases this output is controlled by the SIO board but only on command by the application running on the
processor board.

Copyright  2015 Tokheim


TQC Service Manual V12.3 Page 36 of 226
3. USER INTERFACE DESIGN
3.1. HAND HELD TERMINAL
The hand held terminal (HHT) is a device used for setting up the configuration, setup, maintenance, operation
and data access of the TQC. The device contains the following software and hardware components:

• IrDA interface
• Alphanumerical keypad
• Dot matrix display
• Serial port for downloading software to the HHT
• Battery (rechargeable)
• Serial port to communicate with the TQC, instead of IR.

Figure 50 Hand Held Terminal

Copyright  2015 Tokheim


TQC Service Manual V12.3 Page 37 of 226
3.1.1. IRDA INTERFACE
The IrDA defines specifications for communications protocols for the short-range exchange of data over infrared
light. In this case the communication will be done between the HHT and the TQC inside the dispenser.

IrDA

Figure 51 IrDA output

3.1.2. ALPHANUMERIC KEYPAD


A keypad is a set of buttons arranged in a block which usually bear digits and other symbols but not a complete
set of alphabetical letters. It is used to input all parameters needed in order to set up the configuration or various
functions of the TQC.

Figure 52 Alphanumerical keypad

Copyright  2015 Tokheim


TQC Service Manual V12.3 Page 38 of 226
3.1.3. DOT MATRIX DISPLAY
A dot matrix display is used to display information on machines. It will display all information and configuration
data from the TQC either by reading it or by the user inputting it through its keypad.

Figure 53 Dot matrix display

3.1.4. COMMUNICATION PORT


The communication port on the hand held terminal is basicly a serial port that is used for charging the HHT
battery. It can also be used to create a physical connection with the TQC or the HHT-extender however the
communication cables are different for those two connection methods.
- For HHT extender (part 954437) the RS-232 that comes with the HHT can be used (Figure 54).
- For direct connecting HHT – TQC a null modem cable is required (part 954019).
Remember to switch the HHT to cable connection using the F8 key.

Figure 54 Serial port RS-232 with USB connection

3.1.5. RECHARGEABLE BATTERY


The battery used to power the HHT is a rechargeable battery, and can be charged using the supplied USB/RS-
232 cable, connected between the connector on the bottom of the HHT and the USB port. Otherwise, use the
supplied PSU to charge the HHT.

Copyright  2015 Tokheim


TQC Service Manual V12.3 Page 39 of 226
Figure 55 Rechargeable battery

3.1.6. MAIN FUNCTIONS OF THE HAND HELD TERMINAL


In order to better understand the system’s functionality, the terminal has been divided into three main parts.
These are the dot matrix display, alphanumeric keypad and functional buttons.

Dot Matrix Display

Functions Buttons

Alphanumeric Keypad

Figure 56 Main functions of HHT

3.1.7. DOT MATRIX DISPLAY


Title of the menu option

I = Infra-red signal
Battery indicator
C = Serial connection

Shows the possible


options which the user
could select.

Indicates the
Up/Down options in number of pages on
menu the menu

Figure 57 Main menu description

Copyright  2015 Tokheim


TQC Service Manual V12.3 Page 40 of 226
From now on the dot matrix display will be shown as follows:

Infrared signal
Battery
Main Menu
1 Operation
2 Management
3 Maintenance
4 Configuration
5 Setup
6 Quit

↑↓ num, press
OK2/2

3.1.8. FUNCTION BUTTONS

Upwards/right option in menus

Back/Cancel Enter/Select in
general main panel
Delete/Remove Select option inside
parameters sub-menus

Downwards/left option in menus


Figure 58 Function buttons

Note: A full description of these functions is given in the following chapter.

3.1.9. ALPHANUMERIC KEYPAD

For input parameters in


the sub-menus

Function keys, i.e. shortcuts


to certain menu functions
(programmable)

On/Off button

Figure 59 Alphanumeric keypad

Note: A full description of these functions is given in the following chapter.

Copyright  2015 Tokheim


TQC Service Manual V12.3 Page 41 of 226
4. OPERATING WITH THE HHT
4.1. OVERVIEW
When the HHT has been connected successfully to the TQC, the first screen shown is to select configuration.
The function keys on the HHT are defined as it follows:

Key Symbol Description


C No save and Return higher level
OK

Confirm and Return higher

SEL Select/unselect checkbox, select radio-box


Start Modify parameter
Enter sub-level
DEL
Delete one character

UP Move up
Move right
Up scroll the parameter list
Next Record number
DOWN Move down
Move left
c) Down scroll the parameter list
d) Previous Record number
# Switch among 123/ABC/abc
Go to next field (e.g. IP address input)
On/Off Turn on/off the Hand-Held Terminal (HHT).
F1-F8 These are shortcuts to often used submenus
(programmable). Examples:
F1: Version info (See 6.3.1/p.51)
F2:
F3: Shift Totals (See 6.3.2/p.51)
F4: Meter Throughput (See 6.3.3/p.52)
F5: Totals Nozzle (See 6.3.4/p.52)
F6: Totals Product (See 6.3.4/p.52)
F7: Totals Dispenser (See 6.3.4/p.52)
F8: Switch HHT communication mode

Copyright  2015 Tokheim


TQC Service Manual V12.3 Page 42 of 226
4.1.1. OPERATING DISTANCE CONDITIONS
Operating the TQC with the HHT can be done at a distance of a maximum of 2 metres at an angle of 0° to 15° in
all directions except above. Note that the HHT has to be aimed to the display receiver. Operating at angles up to
30° decreases the distance to approximately 1 meter. The user can see the communication status on the HHT
upper left corner indicator.

4.1.2. INFORMATION ON DISPLAY


Every screen on the HHT can display eleven rows, and supports an up/down scrolling line.
When there are more than eleven rows, the symbol [OK1/2] will tell the user the page currently being viewed
and the total number of pages. In this case it has 2 pages.

Infrared signal
Battery
Main Menu
1 Operation
2 Management
3 Maintenance
4 Configuration
5 Setup Rows
6 Quit
7……
8…… 1 Page of 2
↑↓ num, press
OK1/2
9…..
↑↓ num, press 2 Page of 2
OK2/2

HHT Screen Panel

4.1.3. SELECT AN OPTION IN THE MENU


When the symbols [↑] or [↓] are present in the screen, it meets vertical single-choice or multiple-choices in the
hand held terminal menu, the user will be able to select the choices by scrolling UP [ ] or DOWN[ ] from
the Hand Held Terminal (HHT). It is also possible to press the number of the menu.
The user could select the item requested by pressing the key SELECT [ ] on the Hand Held Terminal. At last
the user must then press the key OK [ ] in order to be recognized by the system.

Copyright  2015 Tokheim


TQC Service Manual V12.3 Page 43 of 226
Example; Hand Held Terminal (HHT) Screen Panel

Infrared signal Battery


Main Menu
1 Operation
By scrolling with 2 Management
key up/down 3 Maintenance
options menu from 4 Configuration
the HHT device. 5 Setup
6 Weight & Measures
7 Quit

↑↓ num, press OK1/1

Infrared signal Battery Infrared signal Battery


An option has Management
Main Menu
been selected. 1 Delivery Mode
1 Operation
By pressing the 2 Unit Price
2 Management
key OK on the 3 PIN Code
3 Maintenance
HHT, another
4 Configuration
window will
5 Setup
pop up.
6 Weight & Measures
7 Quit

↑↓ num, press OK1/1


↑↓ num, press OK1/1

4.1.4. OPERATIONS MENU ARCHITECTURE

Single Choice

Multiple Choice

The sign ‘ ’is used to denote single choice, while the sign ‘ ’ is used to denote multiple choice.

The SEL key is used to toggle the active choice.

Copyright  2015 Tokheim


TQC Service Manual V12.3 Page 44 of 226
4.2. HAND HELD TERMINAL EXTENDER
4.2.1. INTRODUCTION
The function of the HHT extender is to create an interface between the HHT and IR of TQC display.
This gives service technicians the possibility to operate the HHT more comfortable.

Note: The internal battery must be fully charged before actual use of the assembly.

Charging the internal battery:


A mini-USB connector is provided at the right-hand side of the controller box and two green LEDs at the front
show the status of the battery.
1. Connect a USB adapter or suitable USB power supply to deliver 5V±10% 1Amp and switch-on mains.
2. The ‘CUR’ LED will light if the battery is charging.
When the battery has received most of its charge, the ‘VOLT’ LED will light.
When it is almost completely charged, the charge current is decreased and the ‘CUR’ LED will switch-off.
3. Disconnect mains-power and remove the USB connector.
‘VOLT’ stays on until the ‘START’ button is pressed for a moment.

4.2.2. WARNING
The internal battery of the product is not accessible but connected to the electronics. If the push-button is
pressed, the electronics will activate for about 60 seconds.
However, if the button is kept pressed continuously, the system will not switch-off and the battery will become
depleted.

4.2.3. OPERATION
1. Connect the dedicated cable-assembly (supplied with the HHT) between the HHT (USB or flat
connector) and the extender (9-pole sub-D).
2. Fix the small ‘IR-eye’ box with the suction-cup face-to-face with the IR device at the dial-plate of the
petrol dispenser.
3. Press the ‘START’ button once; the ‘PWR’ LED will go on and the system is operational.
4. The standard HHT powers up in IR mode (the first line of the display shows ‘I’). Press and hold its F8
key for a few seconds to put it in connected mode (‘C’).

Remark: The software of the HHT must be version 01.001.025 or higher to support the RS232 format; the
hardware must be at least version 01.002.01.

Without pointing to the dispenser, keys on the HHT can be pressed to scroll menus, etc.

During communication from TQC to HHT, the ‘BUSY’ LED will flash:
• RED means receiving data from the TQC
• GREEN means transmitting data to the TQC
• During heavy communication the LED appears ORANGE

As long as communication takes place, the extender will keep power on; if no activity is seen for about 1 minute
it will switch-off automatically.
Depending on communication activity, a fully charged battery can supply the HHT extender for a few months
before recharge is needed.

Copyright  2015 Tokheim


TQC Service Manual V12.3 Page 45 of 226
5. HYDRAULIC CONFIGURATION NAMING CONVENTION
This chapter defines a hydraulic configuration naming convention per dispenser. This convention should be
used throughout Tokheim to uniquely identify hydraulic configurations.

There is no need to identify the dispenser type in the hydraulic configuration name, since the hydraulic
configuration of one dispenser can fit into another one as well. E.g. Q410 hydraulic configurations fit into a
Q500T1 as well.

This naming convention is made up of two parts divided by a hyphen:


<Basic name part>-<Hydraulic stack descriptors (1..5)>
• <Basic name part> - Identifies the number of used hydraulic stacks and number of hoses.
• < Hydraulic stack descriptor(s)> - A more specific description is given per hydraulic stack.

5.1. BASIC NAME PART


Characters Description Description
Q Type Identifier for the dispenser. Fixed character Q.
S #StacksUsed Number of used hydraulic stacks.
HH #Hoses Number of hose outlets 1–10. Two characters if the number of
nozzles is 10 or one character when the number of nozzles is less
than 10.
Remark: Master + Slave + Satellite = THREE hoses

5.1.1. HYDRAULIC STACK DESCRIPTORS


Per hydraulic stack or group of hydraulic stacks, the identification is built as follows:
Characters Description Description
# Stack repeater Number of hydraulic stacks with the same configuration (e.g. 4
normal speed blocks). When this identifier is not available, 1
hydraulic block with that configuration will follow.
P Product indicator X = Empty (D1000361). This is for mechanical identification.
N = Normal speed product (40 litre)
H = High speed product (40 litre/80 litre)
V = Very high speed product (130 litre)
U = Ultra high speed product (160 litre)
C = Combined hose
L = LPG
A = Ad-Blue (Since TQC supports 4 active hoses, this can be a
second active hose.)
Y = Only used for VN (130 shared 40/80 lpm). In this setup the Very
High Speed nozzle and Normal speed nozzle are on the same HYM
(preventing the need of 2 HYMs).

OOO Option Indicator This identifier is optional and may not be present. If it is present, it
can have one, two or three characters.
S = Combined with Satellite.
N = Combined with Normal Speed nozzle.
SN = Combined with Satellite and Normal Speed nozzle.
P = Product is different (asymmetric) from previous VHS product.
Not available means the same product (symmetric)
M = Only used for double sided LPG with separate motors.
F = Side C&D for 4 active hoses.
S Side indication A,B,C,D = One side indication (for max 4 active hoses)
2 = 2-sided (A,B)
3 = 3-sided (A,B,C)
4 = 4-sided (A,B,C,D)
‘.’ Stack Separator Indication that the description of this stack has ended. Not needed
as a final character in the name.

Copyright  2015 Tokheim


TQC Service Manual V12.3 Page 46 of 226
6. MENU ORGANISATION
The current TQC system defines three methods of gaining access to menus, PIN only, white-list or Login First.
Marketing defines which access type is to be used on dispensers. In the menu descriptions of Chapter 0 it will
be stated when the menus are different per access type.

6.1. PIN ONLY ACCESS TYPE


It allows the user to enter a PIN code and access the configuration menus with a certain access level.
When this PIN is validated, only the configuration menus relevant to the access level are shown.
When leaving the menu session, all access rights are automatically reset again.

The initially shown menu for PIN only is:

Infrared signal Battery Remark


Select this option to login, user first has to authenticate using a PIN code,
OK: Login afterwards the menu will show the available options
F1: Version Info
F2:
F3: VGA Totals
F3: Shift Totals
F4: Meter Throughput These function keys allow immediate access to the totals via a menu (See
6.3/p.51)
F5: Totals Nozzle
F6: Totals Product
F7: Totals Dispenser
F8:
Press Key 1/1

When choosing “OK: Login”, the user first needs to enter the PIN code before entering the main menu.

Infrared signal Battery Remark


Main Menu Main menu access is shown below
1 Operation Operation/Attendant
2 Management Management/Station manager
3 Maintenance Maintenance
4 Configuration Configuration
5 Setup Setup
7 Quit Quit

↑↓ num, press
OK1/1

Copyright  2015 Tokheim


TQC Service Manual V12.3 Page 47 of 226
A distinct PIN has been defined per menu level. This PIN is always 6 numeric digits and can be changed per
menu level (except for the operation level).

Infrared signal Battery Remark


Max. 3 attempts, after this, configuration access is blocked for half an hour.

The dispenser can be used for deliveries though.

PIN Code: ******

Input PIN 1/1

When the user inputs PIN, the system will display ‘*” for safety reasons.

6.1.1. ACCESS LEVELS


These are the different user levels in the menu of the Hand Held Terminal:

• Operation:
This menu is basically for reading transactions and totals of the system.

• Management:
This menu is meant for setting up the Delivery mode (Connected or Standalone), Unit price of the
products.

• Maintenance:
This menu is meant to do all kind of diagnostic of the system and check the current status of the TQC
system as well.

• Configuration:
This menu can configure the whole system, timers, communication, vapour recovery, Electronic
calibration, etc.

• Setup:
More advance & legally relevant configuration setup system. To change parameters in these menu’s,
the cold start switch needs to be flipped on & off (seal has to be broken).

6.1.2. PIN CODE ERROR HANDLING


Infrared signal Battery Remark
When the password is not recognized by the system, an error display message
will be shown at the bottom of the screen. The user must press C to exit and
PIN Code: ****** retry entering the menu.

PIN Code Error

Copyright  2015 Tokheim


TQC Service Manual V12.3 Page 48 of 226
Infrared signal Battery Remark
When the password length is not correct, an error display message will be shown at
the bottom of the screen. The user must press C to exit and retry entering the
PIN Code: *** menu.

Wrong PIN length

6.2. WHITELIST ACCESS TYPE


The Whitelist access mode requires first choosing a user and filling in the associated PIN before the
configuration session can be started. The main menu will then only show the options that user has access to.
No PIN codes are asked after that and the PIN for any user can only be changed via an update of the entire
whitelist scheme. This can be done in the setup menu (See 7.5.9.5/p.146).

Infrared signal Battery Remark


OK: Login The user may press OK key to enter username & password prior to entering the
F1: Version Info configuration session, or select one of functional keys to realize his operation.
F2:
F3: VGA Totals Product totals to display on the VGA screen (for LCD screens it states Prohibit
Configure denoting no handling implemented)
F4: Lifetime Volume When the Lifetime Totals optional function is set to enabled, pressing this option will
F5: show menu
F6:
F7:
F8:
Press Key 1/1

When pressing Login, the following screen allows choosing username & entering PIN code of that user:

Infrared signal Battery Remark


Login Configuration

[Choose User ]
Management The user-name can be selected from a pre-defined list
[Enter password]
****** The associated password has to be entered by the user

Forgot Password Menu option that can be selected when the password is unknown to the service
engineer.

Press Key 1/1

When entering an incorrect PIN, this will be prompted. You can choose the PIN entry edit box and enter the
correct PIN. When entering three times an incorrect PIN, access to configuration will be blocked for half an hour,
the dispenser can be used for deliveries though.

Copyright  2015 Tokheim


TQC Service Manual V12.3 Page 49 of 226
When you need to obtain access to an unfamiliar pump or just forgot your password, the Forgot Password
option will be able to help you out:

Infrared signal Battery Remark


Login Configuration

[Choose User ]
Forgot Password The user-name has been set to Forgot Password automatically but another user
[Enter password] can still be chosen.
****** The password has to be obtained via your SSD organization
[Forgot Password]
[Call SSD with code] Notification that you have to call your SSD back-office to obtain access. The 16-
digit alpha-numeric text in the bottom of the HHT screen has to be communicated
for the SSD to generate the required PIN code of this user account.
[ 244D5F3A6E7F8F66 ]
Press Key 1/1

When the logged in user has changeable access to the setup menus, also the seal has to be broken after the
PIN is verified for that user. The cold start switch should be flipped on in the left menu. You can press the ‘C’
key to omit this but then you enter the configuration with setup read only rights.
When you switch the cold start switch in ON position, it should be flipped to off position to avoid getting the
pump in cold start mode when it starts again.

Infrared signal Battery Infrared signal


Battery
Setup Authorization Finish Authorization

Turn On Cold Start Turn Off Cold Start


Forgot Password Switch
Switch or

C to Skip Authoriza-
Tion

Standby… 1/1 Standby… 1/1

In both cases above, the user enters the main menu, also when no seal has to be broken (no authorization
required):

Infrared signal Battery Remark


Main Menu Main menu access is shown below
1 Operation Operation(Lowest access level)
2 Management Management
3 Maintenance Maintenance
4 Configuration Configuration
5 Setup Setup (Highest access level)
6 Weight & Measures Weight & Measures
7 Quit Quit

Only the menu items the user has access to will be shown, the rest will be hidden
↑↓ num, press OK1/1 & renumbered.

No PIN codes will be asked once the menu session is in progress.

Copyright  2015 Tokheim


TQC Service Manual V12.3 Page 50 of 226
6.3. FUNCTION KEY HANDLING:
Function keys can activate functionality outside an actual menu session and therefore do not require access
rights to be configured.

6.3.1. VERSION INFO


With the F1 function key the HHT will show the current TQC Application software version and date as well as
the last recorded (major) error per side.

Infrared signal Battery Remark


Software Info Software information menu
TQC: 09.000.01 TQC Software version number
2013/09/30 15:34:10 Date & time the software is generated
MID: 09.001.00 MID software version number (legally relevant components)
2013/09/21 13:56:10 Data and time the MID software was generated
[Last Error] Indication of the last error (per PUMP)
Pump1: 61-100 Error code information in format module – error code
Pulser Error Textual error meaning / extra information
Pump 2: 51-165 The pump number corresponds to the number on the pump, per side.
Integrity Error

Press Key to exit 1/1 Pressing any key / waiting some time will revert to the main login menu.

6.3.2. SHIFT TOTALS


With the F3 function key the HHT will show amount and volume per meter registered during the current shift.

Infrared signal Battery Remark


[Amount] Shift Totals
A1: xxxxxx,xx
A2: xxxxxx,xx Amount: The Total Amount is shown per Pump (A, B, C or D) and per product (1,
B1: xxxxxx,xx 2, …). In this example, A2 represents Pump A, product 2.
B2: xxxxxx,xx
A Whitespace is used between the Volumes and the Amounts.
[Volume]
A1: xxxxxx,xx Volume: The Total Volume is shown per Pump (A, B, C or D) and per product (1,
A2: xxxxxx,xx 2, …). In this example, A2 represents Pump A, product 2.
B1: xxxxxx,xx
B2: xxxxxx,xx

Page 1/2

Copyright  2015 Tokheim


TQC Service Manual V12.3 Page 51 of 226
6.3.3. METER THROUGHPUT FUNCTION
With the F4 function key the lifetime volumes will be shown on the HHT if enabled (See 7.5.4.2.12/p.134):

Infrared signal Battery Remark


Lifetime Volume Menu will show the lifetime total volume per meter / pulser
Meter: Volume
1: xxxxxxxx,xx Lifetime volume of meter 1
2: No answer No answer received from pulser at meter 2
3: CRC mismatch Illegal response from pulser received at meter 3
4: No data Unexpected response data from pulser received

Press C when done

When it has been setup to view meter throughput per product, a mapping of all meters will been done to
products / nozzles, meaning also the 2 VHS and UHS meters have been totalized and will be shown as a single
entry (when applicable).

Infrared signal Battery Remark


Lifetime Volume Menu will show the lifetime total volume per meter / pulser
Meter: Volume
A1: xxxxxxxx,xx Lifetime volume of product A1
A2: No answer No answer received from pulser at product A2
B1: CRC mismatch Illegal response from pulser received at Product B1
B2: No data Unexpected response data from pulser received at product B2.

Press C when done

6.3.4. REQUEST TOTALS


The total query via function keys will perform the query like the totals menu in the Operation menu (See
7.1.1/p.53) but with the following selection criteria:
Function key Selection criteria
Totals per Grouped by Subtotals Details
F5: Totals Nozzle Per Pump
Per Product
F6: Totals Product
Grand No
F7: Totals Dispenser
All Products
Dispenser

The “Per …“ selections will browse through all available records and shows one screen per record found. The
“Dispenser” / “All Products” selection will sum all totals of the selection.
Note: Requesting totals via the function keys will never show TC or EC compensated volume.

Copyright  2015 Tokheim


TQC Service Manual V12.3 Page 52 of 226
7. MENU DETAILS
Infrared signal Battery Remark
Main Menu Operation:
1 Operation See 7.1/p.53
2 Management See 7.2/p.57
3 Maintenance See 7.3/p.62
4 Configuration See 7.4/p.82
5 Setup See 7.5/p.123
7 Quit See 7.8/p.155

↑↓ num, press OK1/1

For whitelist access, the menu’s where no access is allowed to are hidden. All other menu options are
renumbered.

7.1. OPERATION
Infrared signal Battery Remark
Operation Operation
1 Totals Read totals
2 Read Transaction Read transaction data

↑↓ num, press OK1/1

7.1.1. TOTALS
Infrared signal Battery Remark
Totals Request Totals with the following selection criteria:
[Totals Per] Choose selection Dispenser, Per Pump (1-4)
Dispenser
[Grouped by] Choose selection Grand, Connected, Stand-alone,
Grand Per Meter, Shift
[Subtotals] Choose selection All Products, Per Product (*), Product 1,2,3,…
All Products
[Details] When logged in with maintenance level of higher, detailed totals can be
No requested. Lower access levels will always get the regular totals (details=no).

↑↓ SEL to input 1/1

(*) “Per …” will result in multiple screens that allow browsing through all records that match the selection criteria.

Copyright  2015 Tokheim


TQC Service Manual V12.3 Page 53 of 226
7.1.1.1. TOTALS PER DISPENSER
Infrared signal Battery Remark
Grand Total Total, Grand, Connected, Stand alone, Shift
[Dispenser] From version 10 onward, the selected pump / dispenser and the selected
[All Products] product / all products is shown here for reference.
Amount: 14,67 Amount: The total amount delivered on this dispenser.
Volume: 13,20 Volume: Total volume delivered on this dispenser The volume unit, is either
Liter or US Gallon
TC Vol.: 0,00 TC Vol: Temperature Compensated Volume is to correct the (EC corrected)
Raw volume against normalized 15 degrees thermal expansion
EC Vol.:0,00 EC Vol: Electronic (meter) Calibration to correct measurement failures of the
meter, will be applied first to correct the Raw Volume
Num of Deliveries Total number of deliveries for this dispenser
↑↓ Page 1/1

7.1.1.2. TOTALS PER PUMP


Infrared signal Battery Remark
Grand Total Total per pump
[Pump] From version 10 onward, the selected pump / dispenser and the selected
[All Products] product / all products is shown here for reference.
Amount: 14,67 Amount: The total amount delivered on this filling position.
Volume: 13,20 Volume: Total volume delivered on this filling position The volume unit, is
either Liter or US Gallon
TC Volume: 0,00 TC Vol: Temperature Compensated Volume is to correct the (EC corrected)
Raw volume against normalized 15 degrees thermal expansion
EC Volume:0,00 EC Vol: Electronic (meter) Calibration to correct measurement failures of the
meter, will be applied first to correct the Raw Volume
Num of Deliveries Total number of deliveries for this dispenser
Num of 0 deliveries Total Number of zero deliveries
0 Deliveries Vol. Total delivered volume in zero-deliveries
Hose expansion Vol

↑↓ Page 1/2

Infrared signal Battery


Total
Preset Overshoot Vol
Cents overshoot Vol
Idle Vol
Leak Vol

↑↓ Page 2/2

Copyright  2015 Tokheim


TQC Service Manual V12.3 Page 54 of 226
7.1.1.3. TOTALS PER METER
Infrared signal Battery Remark
Meter Total Totals per meter
Meter : 1 Meter number
Amount: 14,67 Amount: The total amount delivered on this meter/product position.
Volume: 13,20 Volume: Total volume delivered on this mter/product The volume unit, is
either Liter or US Gallon
TC Vol.: 0,00 TC Vol: Temperature Compensated Volume is to correct the (EC corrected)
Raw volume against normalized 15 degrees thermal expansion
EC Vol.:0,00 EC Vol: Electronic (meter) Calibration to correct measurement failures of the
meter, will be applied first to correct the Raw Volume
Num of Deliveries Total number of deliveries for this meter
↑↓ Page 1/1

7.1.1.4. SHIFT TOTALS


Infrared signal Battery Remark
Totals Request Totals with the following selection criteria:
[Totals Per] Choose selection Dispenser, Per Pump, Pump 1,2,3,4.
Dispenser
[Grouped by] Choose selection Grand, Connected, Stand-alone,
Shift Per Meter, Shift
[Subtotals] Choose selection All Products, Per Product, Product 1,2,3,…
All Products
[Details] Details will be always No for Shift Totals irrespective of option selected.
No

↑↓ SEL to input 1/1

Infrared signal Battery Remark


Shift Total Shift Total
[Pump 1] From version 11 onward, the selected pump / dispenser and the selected
[Product 1] product / all products is shown here for reference.
Amount: 14,67 Amount: The total amount delivered on this dispenser.
Volume: 13,20 Volume: Total volume delivered on this dispenser

Page 1/4

Copyright  2015 Tokheim


TQC Service Manual V12.3 Page 55 of 226
7.1.2. READ TRANSACTION
Infrared signal Battery Remark
Query Transaction
□Date Date: Identifies the date of the transactions to be shown. The format is
yyyy.mm.dd
[Pump] Pump: Identifies of which Pump the transactions must be shown
All pumps Note: By default “All Pumps” will be selected
[Product] Product: Identifies of which Prod. the transactions must be shown
All products Note: By default “All Products” will be selected
Show Results Show Results :To view results of above selected parameters
(See 7.1.2.1/p.56)

↑↓ SEL to input 1/1

7.1.2.1. TRANSACTION DETAILS


Infrared signal Battery Remark
Transaction
15 records num: 1 15 is the total number of transactions.
1 is the specific record number
SN:0044 SN: Transaction number
Date 2009-01-02 Date: Shows the date of the transaction
Time Start:22:33:07 Time Start: The time it started the transaction
Time Stop:22:33:19 Time Stop: The time it stopped the transaction Pump:
Pump :1 Shows the Pump number
Nozzle ID:1 Nozzle ID: Shows the Nozzle ID number
Error Code:0 Error Code: Error number, if any otherwise 0

↑↓ Page 1/3

Infrared signal Battery Remark


Transaction
15 records num: 1 Current record Delivery
D. Mode: Standalone Mode: It shows either Standalone or connected. In this example:
standalone.
Volume: 13,20 Volume: Shows the price per selected volume unit, i.e Liter,US
Gallon
Amount: 14,67 Amount: The price to pay in the selected currency
Unit Price: 1,111 Unit Price: Shows the price per volume unit
M1 Vol: 13,20 M1 Vol: Meter1 Volume
M2 Vol: 0,00 M2 Vol: Meter 2 Volume
Raw Vol: 13,20 Raw Vol: The measured volume without Temperature
compensation and Electronic calibration.
↑↓ Page 2/3

Copyright  2015 Tokheim


TQC Service Manual V12.3 Page 56 of 226
Infrared signal Battery Remark
Transaction
15 records num: 1 Current record
Ave Temp.: 15,00 Ave Temp: The average Temperature during this transaction
TC Vol.: 0,00 TC Vol: Temperature Compensated Volume is to correct the (EC
corrected) Raw volume against normalized 15 degrees thermal
expansion
EC Vol.:0,00 EC Vol: Electronic (meter) Calibration to correct measurement
failures of the meter, will be applied first to correct the Raw
Volume
Max Flow: 48,04 Max Flow: Shows the maximum flow rate during this transaction
Ave Flow: 48,02 Ave Flow: Shows the average flow rate during this transaction
↑↓ Page 3/3

7.2. MANAGEMENT
Infrared signal Battery Remark
Management Management
1 Delivery Mode See 7.2.1/p.57
2 Unit Price See 7.2.2/p.59
3 VGA Setting See 7.2.3/p.62
4 Start New Shift See 7.2.4/p.60

When options are not applicable, they are hidden.

↑↓ num, press OK1/1

7.2.1. DELIVERY MODE


Infrared signal Battery Remark
Delivery Mode Delivery Mode:
[All Pumps]
○ Connected Connected: Entire Dispenser is controlled via POS
● Standalone Standalone: Entire Dispenser is in standalone mode, not
controlled via POS.

↑↓ SEL to input 1/1

In Standalone

Infrared signal Battery Remark


Delivery Mode Delivery Mode:

○ Connected Connected: Entire Dispenser is controlled via POS


● Standalone Standalone: Entire Dispenser is in standalone mode, not
controlled via POS.

↑↓ SEL to input 1/1

Copyright  2015 Tokheim


TQC Service Manual V12.3 Page 57 of 226
In Connected, CO to SA mode “No”

Infrared signal Battery Remark


Delivery Mode Delivery Mode:

● Connected Connected: Entire Dispenser is controlled via POS

↑↓ SEL to input 1/1

In Connected, CO to SA mode “Yes”

Infrared signal Battery Remark


Delivery Mode Delivery Mode:

● Connected Connected: Entire Dispenser is controlled via POS


○ Standalone Standalone: Entire Dispenser is in standalone mode, not
controlled via POS.

↑↓ SEL to input 1/1


In Connected, CO to SA mode “Disconnected”

If the communication cable isn’t disconnected and the error “90-110” isn’t detected by the TQC:
Infrared signal Battery Remark
Delivery Mode Delivery Mode:

● Connected Connected: Entire Dispenser is controlled via POS

↑↓ SEL to input 1/1

If the communication cable is disconnected and the error “90-110” is detected by the TQC:
Infrared signal Battery Remark
Delivery Mode Delivery Mode:

● Connected Connected: Entire Dispenser is controlled via POS


○ Standalone Standalone: Entire Dispenser is in standalone mode, not
controlled via POS.

↑↓ SEL to input 1/1

Note if a transaction is still payable in connected mode and the delivery mode is changed to standalone
mode, the transaction will be cleared automatically as normal operation from standalone mode; otherwise
the TQC will not allow starting deliveries until the transaction is paid.
This won’t happen as the transaction will not be send to the POS.

Copyright  2015 Tokheim


TQC Service Manual V12.3 Page 58 of 226
7.2.2. UNIT PRICE
Infrared signal Battery Remark
XXX Mode XXX : Standalone / Connected Mode*
Pump 1 The user can select from the available pumps.**
Copy All Prices This option will copy all the unit prices from this pump to all other
[Product 1] available pumps.**
1,100 Product "x" is a default product name, once the name is defined
[Product 2] differently it will appear that way, i.e. like "Diesel".
1,900 Price: It can be customized to the value the user wants to set. This value
[Product 3] will be shown at the dispenser display.
2,000 Note: If number of products cannot be shown on a single page, then
[Product 4] remaining products will be displayed on next page.
2,100

↑↓ SEL to input 1/1

* Note, when setting Connected Mode totals, they will be overwritten by the POS in normal cases. Setting
connected mode prices via the menu needs to be possible though to be compatible with Brazilian POS systems.
** When in connected mode only the unit-price for all pumps are the same, this is replaced by the text
“Dispenser”.

Note: when using the ‘Copy all Prices’ option on an asymmetric hydraulic setup, all the unit prices from the
selected side are copied to the other sides, even if this side is not using this product; also all products of the
dispenser are shown for all pumps.

7.2.3. VGA SETTING


Infrared signal Battery Remark
VGA Setting
1 VGA Audio See 7.2.3.1/p.59
2 Backlight Switch See 7.2.3.2/p.60

↑↓ num, press OK1/1

7.2.3.1. VGA AUDIO


Infrared signal Battery Remark
VGA Audio
Pump: A VGA: Selects one of the VGA’s [A..D]
Audio Volume(%):100 Audio Menu
Test ○ On ● Off Volume in Percentage [0..100]
Audio Volume Test. Start/Stop volume testing.

↑↓ SEL to input 1/1

Copyright  2015 Tokheim


TQC Service Manual V12.3 Page 59 of 226
7.2.3.2. BACKLIGHT SWITCH
Infrared signal Battery Remark
Backlight Switching
Pump: A
● Disable Display switching is disabled
(backward compatibility).
○ Via FCC POS controls backlight switching
○ On Manually switch the display ON.
○ Off Manually switch the display OFF
○ Automatic Display switching is fully controlled by the forecourt
controller
[ Automatic ] Display switching power according time settings in
next items
Time On: 06:00 Time that the display will be switched on
Time Off: 23:00 Time that the display will be switched off

SEL to input 1/1

7.2.4. START NEW SHIFT


Infrared signal Battery Remark
Start New Shift Start New Shift
Confirm It warns that all shift totals will get reset and requires
Press OK to start a confirmation from the User.
new shift After OK is pressed on "Confirm", all the nozzles shift
New totals will be reset.

↑↓ SEL to input 1/1

7.2.5. PIN CODE


This menu will only be shown for PIN Only access type.
When using whitelist access type, this menu is not used.

Infrared signal Battery Remark


PIN Code PIN Code. It shows two option Level PIN
1 Level 1 PIN See 7.2.5.1/p.61
2 Level 2 PIN See 7.2.5.2/p.61

↑↓ num, press OK1/1

Copyright  2015 Tokheim


TQC Service Manual V12.3 Page 60 of 226
7.2.5.1. LEVEL 1 PIN
This menu will only be shown for PIN Only access type.

Infrared signal Battery Remark


Level 1 PIN Code Level 1 PIN code
[Enter New Pin] [Enter New Pin]
***** The PIN Code must be typed here
[Re-Enter New Pin] [Re-Enter New Pin]
***** Confirm the new PIN code

↑↓ SEL to input 1/1

Even if changed PIN is same as previous one, “Operation Success” will be shown at the bottom of the screen.
For PIN change errors see 7.2.5.3/p.62.

7.2.5.2. LEVEL 2 PIN


This menu will only be shown for PIN Only access type. When using whitelist access type, this menu is not used.

Infrared signal Battery Remark


Level 2 PIN Code Level 2 PIN code
[Enter New Pin] [Enter New Pin]
***** The PIN Code must be typed here
[Re-Enter New Pin] [Re-Enter New Pin]
***** Confirm the new PIN code

↑↓ SEL to input 1/1

Even if changed PIN is same as previous one, “Operation Success” will be shown at the bottom of the screen.
For PIN change errors see 7.2.5.3/p.62.

Copyright  2015 Tokheim


TQC Service Manual V12.3 Page 61 of 226
7.2.5.3. PIN CHANGE ERRORS
Infrared signal Battery Remark
Level # PIN Code If Level 1 pin is tried to set same as level 2 and vice
[Enter New Pin] versa then error message will be shown at the
**** bottom of the screen.
[Re-Enter New Pin]
****

PIN cannot be used

Infrared signal Battery Remark


Level # PIN Code If PIN length is wrong then error message will be
[Enter New Pin] shown at the bottom of the screen.
****
[Re-Enter New Pin]
****

Wrong PIN length

Infrared signal Battery Remark


Level # PIN Code If re-entered PIN is different than entered pin, then
[Enter New Pin] error message will be shown at the bottom of the
**** screen.
[Re-Enter New Pin]
****

Re Entered PIN wrong

7.3. MAINTENANCE
Infrared signal Battery Remark
Maintenance Maintenance
1 Dispenser Status see 7.3.1/p.63
2 Diagnostic Info see 7.3.2/p.70
3 Journal Info see 7.3.3/p.73
4 Dispenser Test see 7.3.4/p.75
5 Backup see 7.3.5/p.80

H When options are not applicable, they are hidden.

↑↓ num, press OK1/1

Copyright  2015 Tokheim


TQC Service Manual V12.3 Page 62 of 226
7.3.1. DISPENSER STATUS
This shows potential problem areas. In case a filling position is blocked the menu will show ERR instead of OK
(zie vb). All items that show a different state than OK can be clicked on to get a sub-menu showing more details
and to unblock / reset that problem situation. The unblocking option is not always possible though (VB!)

All items that are problematic are stated on top to also draw the user’s attention and to prevent having to scroll
lots of items down

Infrared signal Battery Remark


Dispenser Status Dispenser Status:
Motor Protect ERR Motor Protection problems (see 7.3.1.1/p.64)
Valve Protect ERR Valve Protection problems (see 7.3.1.2/p.64)
Zero Trans ERR Zero transactions errors (see 7.3.1.3/p.65)
Leak Error ERR Leak detection errors (see 7.3.1.4/p.65)
Slow Flow ERR Slow Flow errors (see 7.3.1.5/p.66)
Preset Overrun ERR Preset Overrun errors (see 7.3.1.6/p.66)
VR ERR VR (see 7.3.1.7/p.66)
CAN Module ERR CAN Module problems: (see 7.3.1.8/p.67)
↑↓ num, press OK 1/2

Infrared signal Battery Remark


Dispenser Status Dispenser Status:
Dispenser Block ERR Shown only when whole dispenser is blocked
(see 7.3.1.9/p.67).
Pump Block* Shown only when one pump/product is blocked
ERR (see 7.3.1.10/p.68).
Nozzle Block ERR Shown only when a single nozzle is blocked
or different nozzles have different block reasons
(see 7.3.1.11/p.68).
Integrity CAN/APP/ERR Modules having an integrity error;
CAN = Only CAN module(s) (see
APP = Only Application module(s)
ERR = Mix of CAN and Application modules
(see 7.3.1.13/p.69)
[End of List] Last entry indicator
↑↓ num, press OK 2/2

The Integrity menu now shows an overview of problematic modules. SD card integrity binding can only be done
via Dispenser Block menu if the SD card integrity is not bound to this TQC.
VR Motor Protect menu is integrated in the regular ‘Motor Protect’ menu
VR Valve Protect menu is integrated in the regular ‘Valve Protect’ menu
Only problematic states are shown in this menu, all items that are OK are not shown.

Copyright  2015 Tokheim


TQC Service Manual V12.3 Page 63 of 226
7.3.1.1. MOTOR PROTECTION
Infrared signal Battery Remark
Motor Protection
Pump: 1 PUMP: Selects one of the available PUMPs where motor
problems have been detected on. This may result in not all
PUMPs to be selectable, meaning the PUMPs that can’t be
selected do not have problematic motors.
Motor: 1 Motor: “x” is the product number of the motor that has a
protection problem (More as 4 times occurred which blocks the
PUMP). Only problematic motors are selectable, including the
VR motor using Motor indication ‘Vapour’.
Reset Select reset to remove blocking
[over under]
Pri: 1 4 Counter (x) for over and under current detection of primary
motor
Sec: 1 1 Counter (x) for over and under current detection of secondary
↑↓ SEL to input 1/1 motor

Infrared signal Battery Remark


Motor Protection
Pump: 1 PUMP: Selects one of the available PUMPs where motor
problems have been detected on. This may result in not all
PUMPs to be selectable, meaning the PUMPs that can’t be
selected do not have problematic motors.
Motor: Vapour Motor: Here the Vapour motor is selected, having a problem.
Reset Select reset to remove blocking
[Vapour]
OVER-CURRENT Problem kind of the Vapour motor

↑↓ SEL to input 1/1

Every time a reset is performed, the status of that PUMP / VR is refreshed and the list of problematic motors is
updated, automatically focussing on the next problematic motor. When all motor errors are solved, the menu
refreshes into the dispenser main menu where the motor protection indication will be set to ‘OK’.

7.3.1.2. VALVE PROTECTION


Infrared signal Battery Remark
Valve Protection
Pump:1 PUMP: Selects one of the available PUMPs where valve
problems have been detected on. This may result in not all
PUMPs to be selectable, meaning the PUMPs that can’t be
selected do not have problematic valves.
Valve: 1 Valve: “x” is the product number of the motor that has a
protection problem (More as 4 times occurred which blocks the
PUMP). Only problematic valves are selectable, including the
VR flow valve using Valve indication ‘Vapour’.
Reset Select reset to remove blocking
[over under]
Main: 1 4 Counter (x) for over and under current detection of main valve
Master: 1 4 Counter (x) for over and under current detection of master
valve
Slave: 1 1 Counter (x) for over and under current detection of slave valve
↑↓ SEL to unblock
1/1

Copyright  2015 Tokheim


TQC Service Manual V12.3 Page 64 of 226
Infrared signal Battery Remark
Valve Protection
Pump:1 PUMP: Selects one of the available PUMPs where valve
problems have been detected on. This may result in not all
PUMPs to be selectable, meaning the PUMPs that can’t be
selected do not have problematic valves.
Valve: Vapour Valve: Here the Vapour flow valve is selected, having a
problem.
Reset Select reset to remove blocking
[Vapour]
UNDER-CURRENT Problem of the Vapour flow valve.

↑↓ SEL to unblock 1/1

Note problems of the VR return valves (when applicable) are reported in the VR menu, not here

Every time a reset is performed, the status of that PUMP / VR is refreshed and the list of problematic valves is
updated, automatically focussing on the next problematic valve. When all valve errors are solved, the menu
refreshes into the dispenser main menu where the valve protection indication will be set to ‘OK’.

7.3.1.3. ZERO TRANSACTION


Infrared signal Battery Remark
Zero Transaction
[Nozzle – Count] Display a list of Pump – Nozzle combinations that have had
zero transactions since the last unblock or system startup.
A1 – 7 times Clicking each list item will unblock that error
B3 – 3 times After resetting the last zero transaction, the main dispenser
status menu will show with indication ‘OK’ for Zero Transaction

↑↓ SEL to unblock 1/1

7.3.1.4. LEAK ERROR


Infrared signal Battery Remark
Leak Error
[Nozzle – Count] Display a list of Pump – Nozzle combinations that have had
leak errors since the last unblock or system start-up.
A2 – 7 times Clicking each list item will unblock that error
After resetting the last leak error, the main dispenser status
menu will show with indication ‘OK’ for Leak Error

↑↓ SEL to unblock 1/1

Note: A leak error on a single product can cause the entire PUMP to get blocked. In this case, the other nozzles
(on which no leak was detected) need to be unblocked separately. This will be shown in the Dispenser Status
main menu (see 7.3.1/p.63) at option Nozzle Block.

Copyright  2015 Tokheim


TQC Service Manual V12.3 Page 65 of 226
7.3.1.5. SLOW FLOW
Infrared signal Battery Remark
Slow Flow
[Slow Flow]
A1 SLOW FLOW Clicking each list item will unblock that error
B4 SLOW FLOW After resetting the last slow flow error, the main dispenser
status menu will show with indication ‘OK’ for Slow Flow

↑↓ SEL to unblock
1/1

7.3.1.6. PRESET OVERRUN


Infrared signal Battery Remark
Preset Overrun
A1 PRESET OVERRUN Clicking each list item will unblock that error
B3 PRESET OVERRUN After resetting the last preset overrun error, the main dispenser
status menu will show with indication ‘OK’ for Preset Overrun

↑↓ SEL to unblock
1/1

7.3.1.7. VAPOUR
Infrared signal Battery Remark
VR Non motor or flow-valve related VR errors
[Nozzle – Error] Show a list of errors per nozzle
B TIMER RUNNING The VR system block timer is running (all nozzles of that side)
B3 UST OC ERROR VR return valve over-current detected
B3 NZL BLOCK TMR The block timer of this nozzle is running due to the error above
(LED on the CSD is red)
After resetting the last VR error, the main dispenser status
menu will show with indication ‘OK’ for VR
↑↓ SEL to input
1/1
Note: In the example, nozzle B3 has two entries. When clearing one of these list entries, all errors related to
that nozzle will be unblocked.

Note: VR Return valves are connected to HYMs. There is one over- and under- current detection per side of the
HYM. The problem might therefore also be in one of the hydraulic valves.

7.3.1.7.1. ERROR EXAMPLES


Possible diagnostics of the errors shown:

Motor Protect: a motor Under-current has occurred.


Possible reasons: motor thermal protection has tripped circuitry inside the motor

Valve Protect: a valve Under-current has occurred.


Possible reasons: Coil damaged or cable disconnected.

Zero transactions: the maximum number of zero transactions has been reached.

Copyright  2015 Tokheim


TQC Service Manual V12.3 Page 66 of 226
Leak detection:
At the start of each delivery, a leak test is started via a request from the Kiosk.

Slow Flow:
Flow is below minimum defined flow.

Preset Overrun:
Flow above defined preset value

Pump Block
Status / selection Pump Block

VR motor Protect: a motor Under-current has occurred.


Possible reasons: motor thermal protection has tripped circuitry inside the motor.

VR valve protect: a valve Under-current has occurred.


Possible reasons: coil damaged or cable disconnected.

VR: other VR problem

7.3.1.8. CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK MODULE


Infrared signal Battery Remark
CAN module This menu only displays a list that currently administrates as
[Module - Problem] being problematic. Check the wiring and CAN bus termination.
Display_A_Master An auto-configure may help solve this problem. If the problem
DISCONNECTED persists, the device may need to be replaced.
Pulser A1
DISCONNECTED
HYM 1
DISCONNECTED
[End of List]
↑↓ SEL to input 1/1

7.3.1.9. DISPENSER BLOCK


Infrared signal Battery Remark
Unblock Dispenser Block details
[Dispenser] Shows the pump-number and the block reason per pump-
number
INTEGRITY PROBLEM Click to view details (see 7.3.1.13/p.69).
SD INTEGRITY BLOCK Unblock / Bind the SD card to this dispenser (
see 7.3.1.12/p. 69)

↑↓ SEL to unblock 1/1

Copyright  2015 Tokheim


TQC Service Manual V12.3 Page 67 of 226
7.3.1.10.PUMP BLOCK
Unblocking Filling Position PUMP Problems:

Infrared signal Battery Remark


Unblock Pump Block problem details
[PUMP Problem] Show a complete list of current pump blocking problems
3 (Block reason) There is currently no PUMP blocking reason other than the
4 (Block reason) manual block defined.

↑↓ SEL to unblock 1/1

Manual blocking a PUMP:

Infrared signal Battery Remark


Manual Block Pump Manual Block usage overview
[PUMP Usage]
3 - ● Used ○ Block Per pump number, it can be chosen to normally use or to block
4 - ● Used ○ Block this pump / PUMP

↑↓ Choose Usage 1/1

Note: This functionality is only used in China. For other global regions, this menu is hidden.

7.3.1.11.NOZZLE BLOCK
Infrared signal Battery Remark
Unblock
[Nozzle or Product]
A1 Zero transaction Clicking this block reason will open a sub-menu showing all
zero-transaction counters per nozzle. This sub-menu also
allows unblocking all errors from this menu.
A3 Slow Flow Clicking this block reason will open a sub-menu showing all
slow flow counters per nozzle. This sub-menu also allows
unblocking all errors from this menu.
B1 EMT broken Unblocks this error immediately
P4 Leak error Clicking this block reason will open a sub-menu showing all
leak counters per nozzle. This sub-menu also allows
unblocking all errors from this menu (The prefix P denotes
‘Product’).
P5 Current Clicking this block reason will open a sub-menu showing all
over- and under-current counters per nozzle. This sub-menu
also allows unblocking all errors from this menu (The prefix P
denotes ‘Product’).
↑↓ SEL to unblock
1/1

Note: When unblocking problems in a sub-menu, they will no longer be listed in this menu any more. When all
block conditions are solved, the dispenser status main menu will be shown where the Nozzle block menu will be
hidden and the Pump Block menu will be available for manual blocking.

Copyright  2015 Tokheim


TQC Service Manual V12.3 Page 68 of 226
7.3.1.12.BIND SD CARD INTEGRITY
Infrared signal Battery Remark
Integrity Integrity
[Press]
C to Cancel Leave the situation as it is now
OK to Bind SD card Bind the SD card to this TQC
[Eject card and]
OK to Reset Error Remove the SD card and unblock the situation. Not removing
the card will also bind it to this TQC.

↑↓ SEL to input 1/1

Note: When this menu is shown, it is safe to eject / insert the SD card without generating additional errors.
7.3.1.13.INTEGRITY
Infrared signal Battery Remark
Integrity
[Module – Problem]
HYM 1 Peripheral module that has a problem:
problem The problem-field describes the reason of the integrity
problem. This may occur when an interchanged (e.g. pulser)
device is changed. It is needed to accept this change to
unblock the dispenser.
It is possible to have multiple problems for the same module.
Unblocking of Peripheral integrity must be done per module by
clicking OK on the selected Module.
Login Setup RW to Text to state the user has to login with Setup RW access (flip
cold start switch) before the unblock applications option
becomes available.
↑↓ SEL to input 1/3

Infrared signal Battery Remark


Integrity
Accept Applications One global option to only unblock all Application modules.
(Can only be used when the user logs in with Setup RW
access).
[ProcessMgr.Arm] Non-peripheral that has a problem:
The problem-field describes the reason of the integrity
problem. If this occurs, fraud has been detected. Be aware of
this before accepting these changes in the system.
[Module-name] The software checksum is different than the previous one.
CHECKSUM
↑↓ SEL to input 2/3

Copyright  2015 Tokheim


TQC Service Manual V12.3 Page 69 of 226
Infrared signal Battery Remark
Integrity
[Module-name] The software version is different than the previous one
SW VERSION
[Module-name] The hardware serial number is different than the previous one.
SERIAL
[Module-name] The hardware version is different than the previous one.
HW VERSION
[Module-name] This device is seen on the CAN bus but is not expected to be
UNEXPECTED present
↑↓ SEL to input 3/3

7.3.1.14.SMD MOTOR ERROR


Infrared signal Battery Remark
Smd Motor Error
[Nozzle – Count] Display a list of Fip – Nozzle combinations that have smd motor
error(s) since the last unblock or system startup.
A2 – 1 times Clicking each list item will unblock that error
B6 – 3 times
Note: counting is done on the first product with additive for a
dosing nozzle. The product with another ratio on the same
dosing nozzle is using the same smd motor (same additive
type).
↑↓ SEL to unblock 1/1

7.3.2. DIAGNOSTIC INFO


Retrieve information from the TQC such as diagnostic, errors, Records saved in the system.

Infrared signal Battery Remark


Query Diagnostic
[ Query by] [ Query by]
●Error Error: Diagnostic errors
(see 0/p.71).
○VR Blocking VR: VR block timer diagnostic info
(see 7.3.2.2/p.71).
○VR Deliveries VR: VR delivery diagnostic info
(see 7.3.2.3/p.72).
[ Grouped By] [ Grouped By]
Pump: All pumps Pump: All pumps / Pump #
Prod: All products Prod Products: All products / Product #
Show results Shows all ‘error diagnostics’

↑↓ SEL to input 2/2

Copyright  2015 Tokheim


TQC Service Manual V12.3 Page 70 of 226
7.3.2.1. ERROR DIAGNOSTICS
Infrared signal Battery Remark
Error
X record: 1 Record 1 of X
SN: Sequence number
Module Id: ID of the module causing the error
Error type: x x: Error number
Error Class: MINOR MINOR or MAJOR error
[Error detail] Textual detail of this error.
xxxxx
Total: How often did this specific error occur?
PUMP id: On which PUMP did this error occur?
Prod ID: Which Product was in use when this error
occurred?
Data: Date of error occurrence
Time: Time of error occurrence
↑↓ SEL to input 2/2

7.3.2.2. VR BLOCKING
Infrared signal Battery Remark
Vapour Blocking
X record: 1 Record 1 of X
Pump: F Fuelling point F
VR system / Nozzle N VR system (all nozzles of the displayed PUMP)
or nozzle N of the displayed PUMP.
Date: Y Date the system will / has been blocked
Time: Z Time the system will / has been blocked
No block situation This nozzle / PUMP is not blocked and no timer
is running to block in the near future, Date / Time
is not shown.
Bad eff. Count: E Current number of consecutive bad efficiencies
administrated for nozzle N.
Block reason: R The blocking or block-timer is started due to the
reason stated at R *.

↑↓ Pre/Next

(*) Options:
Invalid VR Config: please check the VR configuration
No VR hardware: VR configured but no hardware is fitted to serve ECVR
Too many bad eff.: Maximum bad efficiency count exceeded for nozzle N
Motor OC / UC ID x: VR pump motor Over or Under-current of motor x
Flow valve OC / UC x: VR proportional valve Over or Under-current of valve x
OC / UC of UST (Underground Storage Tank) valve or Return valve OC / UC: Over or Under-current detected at
the VR return valve of nozzle N
Not calibrated: VR needs to be calibrated prior to use.

Copyright  2015 Tokheim


TQC Service Manual V12.3 Page 71 of 226
7.3.2.3. VR DELIVERIES
Vapour delivery diagnostics information

Infrared signal Battery Remark


Vapour Delivery
PUMP: F Selected PUMP the data is shown for
Nozzle: N Nozzle that was used for this delivery
Date: Timestamp the delivery started. Records are
Time: sorted latest to oldest.
Fuel Volume: Total fuel volume that was administrated by VR.
Max Fuel Flow: Maximum fuel flowrate registered during this
delivery
Max Aperture: Largest proportional valve setting used in this
delivery. If this value becomes (close to) 255
(max valve setting), it might be that the VR
system is no longer capable of having good
efficiency at high fuel flows.

The following fields are SCG specific parameters and these are not shown when VR is running in OL mode.

Copyright  2015 Tokheim


TQC Service Manual V12.3 Page 72 of 226
Infrared signal Battery
VCC Efficiency: Vapour compared to fuel volume efficiency (only
in SCG mode). This is calculated as (vcc Vol –
vcc inv. Vol) / (fuel Vol – fuel inv. Vol) where the
invalid volume is the volume that was measured
below 25 l/minute if table was updated. If the
table was not updated, the efficiency is
calculated as (vcc vol) / (fuel vol).
VCC Volume: Total Vapour volume measured by VCC
Max VCC Flow: Maximum (corrected) VCC vapour flowrate
registered.
VCC Q-P Ratio: VCC Flow/Pressure ratio. This ratio over time
tells the health of the VR system. When the
system is becoming blocked, this ratio will
decrease as the pressure will increase. When a
leak occurs, the ratio is higher because the
pressure is lower.
Table updated: Status of the delivery and table-updating
mechanism.
Bad Eff. Count: Current bad efficiency counter for this hose after
this delivery.
SEL to input 1/1

Possible statuses are:

• Updated: OK efficiency, so the table was updated


• Per. control failed: Negative response to VR peripheral control
• Per. control timeout: Timeout controlling a VR peripheral
• Peripheral Over-current: Over-current on a VR peripheral
• Peripheral Under-current: Under-current on a VR peripheral
• VR Return valve closed: VR Return valve closed un-intentionally
• Delivery start fail: Failed to start a VR delivery
• Open Loop mode: VR is running in Open loop mode (table updating is only possible in SCG mode)
• Insufficient Volume: Insufficient fuel volume for table updating
• No SCG samples: Too little high fuel-flow samples to allow the table updating mechanism
• Bad vapour efficiency: VCC efficiency was out of the accepted range

7.3.3. JOURNAL INFO


Infrared signal Remark
Battery
Journals
○General General loggings with 5 different sub ID
(see 7.3.3.1/p.74).
○EC Electronic calibration loggings
(see 7.3.3.2/p.74).
○Function Function change journal loggings
(see 7.3.3.3/p.74).
○Unit price change Unit-price change loggings
(see 7.3.3.4/p.75).
○Software integrity Software integrity loggings
(see 7.3.3.5/p.75)
↑↓ SEL to input
1/1

Copyright  2015 Tokheim


TQC Service Manual V12.3 Page 73 of 226
7.3.3.1. GENERAL JOURNAL
Infrared signal Remark
Battery
General Journal
X Records: 1 Record 1 of X
UTN UTN which generated the log
Date Date of logging
Time Time of logging
User ID: ID of logged in user
User Name Name of logged in user
Sub ID Currently 5 sub ID’s possible:
1 = Start HHT configuration Session, data states
menu level entered
2 = End HHT configuration
3 = PUMP started
4= PUMP suspended
5 = Door open
6 = Cold start switch change
Journal data Description of logging
↑↓ SEL to input 1/1

7.3.3.2. ELECTRONIC CALIBRATION JOURNAL


Infrared signal Remark
Battery
EC
X Records: 1 Record 1 of X
UTN UTN which generated the log
Date Date of logging
Time Time of logging
User ID: ID of logged in user
User Name Name of logged in user
Meter ID: ID of calibrated meter
K factor K factor calculated during this EC
Cum Volume Totals All totals cumulative
EC volume totals Volume delivered during EC
↑↓ SEL to input 1/1

7.3.3.3. FUNCTION CHANGE JOURNAL


Infrared signal Remark
Battery
Function
X Records: 1 Record 1 of X
UTN UTN which generated the log
Date Date of logging
Time Time of logging
User ID: ID of logged in user
User Name Name of logged in user
Product: Product associated
Meter ID: Meter ID associated
Function: Function ID that changed: 1=Electronic
Calibration
2=Temperature Compensation
New state: New state of this function (e.g. Enabled or
Disabled)
Text: Additional textual log Remark
↑↓ SEL to input 1/1

Copyright  2015 Tokheim


TQC Service Manual V12.3 Page 74 of 226
7.3.3.4. UNIT PRICE CHANGE JOURNAL
Infrared signal Remark
Battery
Unit price
X Records: 1 Record 1 of X
UTN UTN which generated the log
Date Date of logging
Time Time of logging
User ID: ID of logged in user
User Name Name of logged in user
Nozzle: Nozzle for which price is changed
Delivery mode Delivery mode for the changed unit price
Cum Volume Totals All totals cumulative
New unit price
↑↓ SEL to input 1/1

7.3.3.5. SOFTWARE MODULE CHANGE JOURNAL


Infrared signal Remark
Battery
Software Module
X Records: 1 Record 1 of X
[Module] Which software module has been changed
IOHandler.Arm
Version: 09.000.96 Software version of the module
CRC:00004B68 Checksum of the module
Date:YYYY-MM-DD Compile date & time of the module
Time:hh:mm:ss
↑↓ SEL to input 1/1

7.3.4. DISPENSER TEST


Infrared signal Remark
Battery
Dispenser test
1Test Delivery or See 7.3.4.1/p.76
2 VR Tests See 7.3.4.2/p.77
3 Comm Board See 7.3.4.3/p.80

↑↓ num, press OK1/1

Copyright  2015 Tokheim


TQC Service Manual V12.3 Page 75 of 226
7.3.4.1. TEST DELIVERY
Test delivery will be performed in Connected mode (using POS). POS Therefore needs to authorize the delivery.

Note: Depending on what menu settings have been changed prior to choosing the Test Delivery, initialization
can take some time and a progress screen will be shown during initialization.

Infrared signal Remark


Battery
Test Delivery Test Delivery
Pump: 1 Which pump to initiate test deliveries for
[ Preset] Setup of the test delivery
●Time 00:05:00 Time: Set the time to be tested
○Amount 1000,00 Or Amount: Set the amount to be tested
○Volume 1000,00 Or Volume: Set the volume to be tested
[ Pulse Hide ] Pulse hide : Enable or disable
●Disabled ○Enabled

↑↓ SEL to input 1/1

7.3.4.1.1. TEST DELIVERY CSD SETUP


During the actual test delivery, the CSD can be controlled with different metrics than during a real delivery.
Picking a nozzle will start the actual test delivery on the selected pump

Infrared signal Remark


Battery
Test Delivery
Pump : 3 Pump number selected to perform the delivery
on
[Display Line Setup] What delivery metric to show on which line of the
Top: Volume CSD
Bottom: Amount
UP: Max Flowrate See 7.3.4.1.1.1/p.77 for possible data types.

[Pick Nozzle] Lifting a nozzle will start the already setup test
delivery on the selected pump with the currently
↑↓ SEL to input 1/1 setup display metrics.

Copyright  2015 Tokheim


TQC Service Manual V12.3 Page 76 of 226
7.3.4.1.1.1. POSSIBLE TEST DELIVEREY DATA
Line Note
Amount Total amount as shown during normal delivery.
Avg Tempratu Average Fuel temperature during this test delivery
Cur FlowRate
This metric is only updated once per 5 seconds and denotes the
Ec Volume absolute delta volume compared to the raw volume: net volume =
raw volume ± TC volume ± EC volume.
Gallus Flow Gallus flow rate
Gallus Volume Total Gallus flow during this test delivery, only updated per 5s.
Hyd Current
Max FlowRate Max flow during this test delivery
Max Tempratu Maximum Fuel temperature during this test delivery
Top/Bottom: The first 3 digits are reserved for the primary meter’s data, the
6 or 7 digits depending on CSD type. Mtr. FlowRate last 3 digits for the secondary meter’s data. When having a 775
layout, a space in-between is shown, for 664, no space can be
shown in-between. When only a single meter is used, the data is
Up: Mtr. Temprat right-aligned.
4 or 5 digits depending on CSD type. When VHS product it’s recommended to only use
Net Volume This metric is only updated once per 5 seconds
Raw Volume This metric is only updated once per 5 seconds
This metric is only updated once per 5 seconds and denotes the
Tc Volume absolute delta volume compared to the raw volume: net volume =
raw volume ± TC volume ± EC volume.
Vcc cor. Flow
Vcc Efficiency
Vcc Headloss
Vcc uncor. Fl
Vcc Volume
Volume Total volume as shown during normal delivery.
Vr Duty Cyle Only updated per 5s.

7.3.4.2. VR TEST
Infrared signal Remark
Battery
VR Test
●Dry Test See 7.3.4.2.1/p.78
○Air Tightness See 7.3.4.2.2/p.78
○Leak test See 7.3.4.2.3/p.79
○TuV Test See 7.3.4.2.4/p.79

↑↓ SEL to input
1/1

Copyright  2015 Tokheim


TQC Service Manual V12.3 Page 77 of 226
7.3.4.2.1. DRY TEST
Dry Test: Normal vapour delivery with preset values but without fuel. The simulated fuel flow can be set as a
constant value during the entire dry test as well as the test time and which product to test. This test will test the
quality of the VR calibration.

Infrared signal Remark


Battery
Dry Test
Test Duration: 60 s Test Duration: here the value can be set.

↑↓ SEL to input 1/1

7.3.4.2.2. AIR TIGHTNESS


Air Tightness: Vapour system and Leakage test, VR Motor & Valves can separately switched on/off/open in
order to measure if there are leakages in the VR system. An external gas meter is required for this test. The test
will run for a maximum of 5 minutes unless the operator puts the VR motor (off and) on again of (re-)opens the
VR valve on all sides the test is being performed

Infrared signal Remark


Battery
Air Tightness Test
[ Device Control ]
Set Motor A-B On Set Motor A-B: Switch motor on/off.
Set Valve A Set Valve A: Open/Close.
Open Set Valve B: Open/Close
Set Valve B [ Status Motor / Valve ]
Open Shows the status for the Motor /
[ Status Motor Valve for FIP A and FIP B
Valve ]
FIP A Off Closed
FIP B Off Closed

↑↓ SEL to input 1/1

Copyright  2015 Tokheim


TQC Service Manual V12.3 Page 78 of 226
7.3.4.2.3. LEAK TEST
Leak test : The leak test works as an ‘automated’ air-tightness test, only it does not allow manual switching of
valve & motor. It therefore also requires the gallus meter to be connected to the VR outlet and the optical cable
to be fitted into the TQC. The leak test is to be run on per FIP, takes 1 minute to complete and has two phases:
Start phase, leak test phase.

Infrared signal Battery Remark


Leak Test
FIP: x FIP: Selects one of the available FIPs
Start Start: Begin diagnosing the system

Connect Gallus to VR output flange and


connect optical cable to TQC.

↑↓ SEL to input 1/1

Leak Test Remarks:

Starting phase: Allows the system to be sucked vacuum and let the Gallus measure any flow from that. This
phase will take 10 seconds in which the vacuum must have been stabilized. During this time, the VR Module
allows any gallus flow to be detected (this is ignored but displayed on the HHT). After the expiry of the vacuum
stabilizing time, the next phase is initiated:
Leak test phase: This phase starts with a steady vacuum and will run for 50 seconds, checking if Gallus holes
are seen. Two gallus holes are allowed to be seen before the error ‘leak detected’ is generated and the test will
immediately stop. If after this time, there is no ‘leak’ detected, the test finalizes with OK result.

This test will not be able to detect the smallest of leaks as only the holes on the optical wheel of the Gallus
meter can be used. A leak-flow of roughly 7,5 ml / second or 450 ml / minute might be accepted as OK in this
test. An exact figure of this leak flow is hard to give because of a non-linear optical wheel movement and the
start position of the disc prior to running the test.

Note: A Gallus meter is always required for this test, the VCC will / cannot be used for leak test purposes for two
reasons:
VCC is not accurate in low-flow conditions having a very low pressure.
Leaks between VCC and pump will not be seen if the VCC would even be suitable for this purpose.
Not connecting a Gallus properly will also not detect leaks if there are any.

7.3.4.2.4. TUV TEST


TuV test: Facilitates testing of administrating bad vapour efficiencies by using temporary parameters for VR
nozzle block conditions.

Infrared signal Remark


Battery
TuV Test
FIP: x FIP: Selects one of the available FIPs, or
Start All FIPs
Start: Begin diagnosing the system
Note: For V10 onwards, FIP will be
replaced by Pump for standardization
of naming

↑↓ SEL to input 1/1

TuV test Remarks:

Copyright  2015 Tokheim


TQC Service Manual V12.3 Page 79 of 226
There’s no visual indication that the test is active and it will only be active for the first delivery (or dry test) on
that side.
The latest 02 and 03 releases also allow selecting FIP “All” denoting to run the test on all FIPs with a single HHT
action.
Start: Activate TuV parameters in the selected side. TuV parameters will set the number of bad efficiencies
(before the nozzle block timer is started) temporarily to ‘1’ and the time before that nozzle actually blocks
temporarily to 1 minute. In the latest 02 and 03 release it will also clear the bad efficiency counters for all non-
blocked VR nozzles.
After pressing “Start”, the menu traverses to a menu where the dry test can be started. Either the dry test or a
real delivery can be used to perform the TuV test on the selected side(s) now.
Please note that the bad efficiency is to be created manually by either blocking the VR inlet of the nozzle or put
a electrical resistor on the motor or valve output such that the physical VR system does not really operate but
the TQC does not detect this.
The delivery or dry test must meet the minimum conditions set in the VR configuration (minimum flow (25 l/min)
for a specified minimum time (20 seconds) and a minimum fuel volume (20 liter), these numbers are default
numbers and can be different in your situation).

7.3.4.3. COMM BOARD


Infrared signal Remark
Battery
Comm Board Test Comm Board
[ Comm Board ]
LON
Address:17
Start Test Start Test: Begin diagnosing the system

↑↓ num, press OK1/1

7.3.5. BACKUP
Infrared signal Remark
Battery
Backup
1 Settings see 7.3.5.1/p.80
2 Backup see 7.3.5.2/p.81
3 Format card see 7.3.5.3/p.81

↑↓ num, press OK1/1

7.3.5.1. SETTINGS
Infrared signal Remark
Battery
Automatic Backup
●Enable Enable: Automatic backup function.
●Disable Disable: Automatic Backup.

↑↓ num, press OK1/1

Copyright  2015 Tokheim


TQC Service Manual V12.3 Page 80 of 226
7.3.5.2. START BACKUP
Infrared signal Remark
Battery
Backup
[ Dispenser ID ]
123456789012
[ CPU ID ]
4BC00C0000000000
1 Backup Now Backup of the current Last Known Good
configuration to internal flash and SD card (when
a writable SD card is present).
[Internal Status] After starting the backup, the progress menu
(see 7.3.5.2.1/p.81) will be displayed.
Backup present Shows the current internal (flash) backup state
[External Status] Shows the current external (SD card) backup
Backup present state
[Auto Status] Shows the current external (SD card) automatic
Backup present backup state. This status denotes the presence
of the backup, regardless of the current auto-
↑↓ SEL to input 1/1 backup setting

Note: The Last Known Good / Internal flash backup can be created when leaving the menu’s after having
logged in with at least Maintenance RW access rights (entered the Maintenance or higher PIN).
Note: When the user has changed a setting in the same menu session the backup is to be made, the user is
prompted that this is only possible when leaving the menus.

7.3.5.2.1. BACKUP PROGRESS


If the automatic backup is enabled first time the following menu will be shown

Infrared signal Remark


Battery
Backup generation
[ Dispenser ID ]
123456789012
[ CPU ID ]
4BC00C0000000000
Initializing Backup Status of backup. Initializing, backup, finalizing or
created
Please wait

↑↓ SEL to input 1/1

7.3.5.3. FORMAT CARD


Infrared signal Remark
Battery
Format card
Start After formatting the SD-card, TQC will already
This will erase any create the next folder structure for SD back-ups.
existing data
Are you sure ? /home/TQC/TQCBackup/DISP_ID_XXXXXXX/C
PU_ID_YYYYYYYY/DB*

* XXXXXXXX: dispenser ID
↑↓ num, press OK1/1 * YYYYYYYY: dispenser serial number

Copyright  2015 Tokheim


TQC Service Manual V12.3 Page 81 of 226
7.4. CONFIGURATION
This menu shows the configuration information and allows setting up the elemental parameters in order to have
an operating dispenser.

Infrared signal Remark


Battery
Configuration
1 Dispenser Info See 7.4.1/p.82
2 Calculator Info See 7.4.2/p.83
3 Software Info See 7.4.3/p.85
4 Hydraulic See 7.4.4/p.87
5 Communication See 7.4.5/p.92
6 Timer See 7.4.6/p.101
7 Fraud Protection See 7.4.7/p.102
8 Optional Functions See 7.4.8/p.103
9 Prod Configuration See 7.4.9/p.112
10 Name Tables See 7.4.10/p.112
11 Reserved See 7.4.11/p.113
12 Reserved See 7.4.12/p.113
13 Meter Calibration See 7.4.13/p.114
14 Vapour Recovery See 7.4.14/p.115
15 Display Config See 7.4.15/p.120
16 PIN Code See 7.4.16/p. 122
17 Delivery Handling See 7.4.16/p.122
18 Select Language See 7.5.4.6/p.141
↑↓ num, press OK2/2

7.4.1. DISPENSER INFO


Infrared signal Remark
Battery
Dispenser Info
Type: TQC Display the information about the dispenser
SN: 123456789012 Type: TQC(Tokheim Quality Calculator)
[Pump : A B C SN: Shows serial number
D] Pump: Which Filling Position is used
Pump Nr: 1 2 Pump Nr: Gives the pump number

↑↓ SEL to input 1/1

Copyright  2015 Tokheim


TQC Service Manual V12.3 Page 82 of 226
7.4.2. CALCULATOR INFO
This menu shows the information about the hardware components of the TQC.

Infrared signal Remark


Battery
Calculator Info
Pre-processor See 7.4.2.1/p.83
Communication Board See 7.4.2.2/p.83
Pulser See 7.4.2.3/p.84
VCC See 7.4.2.4/p.84
Display See 7.4.2.5/p.84
HYM See 7.4.2.6/p.84
SIO See 7.4.2.7/p.85

↑↓ num, press OK 1/1

7.4.2.1. PRE-PROCESSOR
Infrared signal Remark
Battery
Pre-processor
[ Device Identifier] [Device Identifier]
Pre-processor Shows the information of the Pre-processor

[ Hardware Version] [Hardware ]


TQC-EI03 Shows the hardware version
[SN] [SN]
Not programmed Shows the serial number

C to return 1/1

7.4.2.2. COMMUNICATION BOARD


Infrared signal Remark
Battery
Communication
Board [Device Identifier]
[ Device Identifier] Shows the information of the Communication
Pre-processor Board

[ Hardware Version] [Hardware ]


TQC-EI03 Shows the hardware version
[SN] [SN]
Not programmed Shows the serial number

C to return 1/1

Copyright  2015 Tokheim


TQC Service Manual V12.3 Page 83 of 226
7.4.2.3. PULSER
Infrared signal Remark
Battery
Pulser
[ Device Identifier] [ Device Identifier]
MPC_A1 Pulser

[ Hardware Version] [Hardware Version]


PUR-MPC3 Shows the hardware version
[SN] [SN]
Not programmed Shows the serial number

C to return 1/1

7.4.2.4. VCC
Infrared signal Remark
Battery
VCC
[ Device Identifier] [Device Identifier]
VCC VCC

[ Hardware Version] [Hardware Version]


Shows the hardware version
[SN] [SN]
Not programmed Shows the serial number

C to return 1/1

7.4.2.5. DISPLAY
Infrared signal Remark
Battery
Display
[ Device Identifier] [Device Identifier]
Display_A_Master Display

[ Hardware Version] [Hardware Version]


CSD3 Shows the hardware version
[SN] [SN]
Not programmed Shows the serial number
C to return
1/1

7.4.2.6. HYM
Infrared signal Remark
Battery
HYM HYM
[ Device Identifier] Shows the information about HYM
HYM_1 HYM

[ Hardware Version] [ Device Identifier]


HYMC-E6 Pulser
[SN] [Hardware Version]
Not programmed Shows the hardware version
C to return [SN]
1/1 Shows the serial number

Copyright  2015 Tokheim


TQC Service Manual V12.3 Page 84 of 226
7.4.2.7. SIO
Infrared signal Remark
Battery
Pulser
[ Device Identifier] Shows the information about Slave IO
Slave_IO SIO

[ Hardware Version] [ Device Identifier]


PUR-MPC3 Pulser
[SN] [Hardware Version]
Not programmed Shows the hardware version
[SN]
C to return 1/1 Shows the serial number

7.4.3. SOFTWARE INFO


Infrared signal Remark
Battery
Software Info
1 Kernel Version See 7.4.3.1/p.85
2 Application Build See 7.4.3.2/p.86
3 Application Module See 7.4.3.3/p.86
4 Peripheral Modules See 7.4.3.4/p.86

↑↓ num, press OK1/1

7.4.3.1. KERNEL VERSION


Infrared signal Remark
Battery
Kernel Linux kernel
[ Name] [Version]
TqcKernel It shows the version of the Kernel used
[ Version] [Checksum]
01.000.02
[ Time]
2010.01.26 10:03:44

C to return 1/1

Copyright  2015 Tokheim


TQC Service Manual V12.3 Page 85 of 226
7.4.3.2. APPLICATION BUILD
Infrared signal Remark
Battery
Application build
[ Version] [Version]
07.004.07 Version number of the application used
[ Time] (example)
2013.07.26 16:03:44
[ MID version] Timestamp if this application
07.003.05
[MID time] Version number of the applicable MID
2013.06.23 09:11:33 certificate

Timestamp of the MID certificate


C to return 1/1

7.4.3.3. APPLICATION MODULE


Infrared signal Remark
Battery
Application Module
[ Modules] [Modules]
ProcessMgr.Arm It shows all the TQC application modules.

[ Version] [Version]
01.000.25 It shows the version of the selected module.
[ Checksum] [Checksum]
00005811 This shows the checksum of the selected
module.

C to return 1/1

7.4.3.4. PERIPHERALS MODULES


Infrared signal Remark
Battery
Peripheral Module
[ Type] [Type ]
HYM Here you select the type of Peripheral
[ Name] [Name]
HYM_1 In case more than one peripheral is present of
the same type (e.g. pulser) then you can select
here one of the available devices.
[ SW Version] [SW Version ]
01.000.32 Shows the software version
[ SW Checksum] [SW Checksum]
0000E709 Shows the checksum used.

C to return 1/1

Note: The main purpose of this sub-menu is to give information about all the software modules of the TQC such
as version of the Application installed, its peripheral version, which CAN addresses are configured in the TQC.

Copyright  2015 Tokheim


TQC Service Manual V12.3 Page 86 of 226
7.4.3.5. VGA MODULE
Infrared signal Remark
Battery
VGA Module
VGA build
[ Version] [Version]
01.000.25 Version number of VGA module
[Time] [Time]
10:34:25 Time when module is generated
[ Checksum] [Checksum]
00005811 Checksum of VGA module.

C to return 1/1

Note: The main purpose of this sub-menu is to give information about the all modules software of the TQC such
as version of the Application installed, its peripheral version, which CAN addresses are configured in the TQC.

7.4.4. HYDRAULIC
Infrared signal Remark
Battery
Hydraulic
1 Submerged See 7.4.4.1/p.87
2 Combined Hose See 7.4.4.2/p.87
3 LPG See 7.4.4.3/p.88
4 HS Control See 7.4.4.4/p.88
5 Preset See 7.4.4.5/p.89
6 Local Preset Input See 7.4.4.6/p.90
7 Valve Error Control See 7.4.4.7/p.92

↑↓ num, press OK1/1

7.4.4.1. SUBMERGED
Infrared signal Remark
Battery
Submerged Submerged
Valve Delay:0 Valve Delay: this is the delay (in seconds)
between switching on the motor and opening
the valve. This will allow the “submerged”
system to build up the pressure on the pipes to
the dispenser. This to allow for a smooth start
of the delivery. 0-10 sec, default is set to 0

↑↓ SEL to input 1/1

7.4.4.2. COMBINED HOSE


Infrared signal Remark
Battery
Combined Hose Combined Hose
[ Prod Pre-Selection ]
○ No Not implemented yet.
● Yes

↑↓ SEL to input 1/1

Copyright  2015 Tokheim


TQC Service Manual V12.3 Page 87 of 226
7.4.4.3. LPG
Infrared signal Remark
Battery
LPG
[Nozzle Switch]
○ None With or without Nozzle switch (deadmans
● Open button only)
○ Closed Normally Open or Normally Closed nozzle
switch
[ Interlock ]
○Enabled ●Disabled When enabled lifting a LPG nozzle will block
dispensing all other nozzles on the same
dispenser
↑↓ SEL to input 1/2

Infrared signal Remark


Battery
LPG
[Chair Valve] Chair valve not fitted, one valve is fitted per
●None side or only one is fitted in the dispenser.
○One per PUMP
○One per 2 PUMPs
Nozzle Delay: Nozzle Delay: Maximum time between taking
the nozzle and pushing the deadmans button.
Range is min 1 and Max 300 Seconds
This timer is also used when push to start is
enabled. It then is used for the maximum time
between taking the nozzle and pushing push to
start.
Button Delay: 5 Button Delay: this is the delay between
releasing the deadmans button and ending the
delivery.
Range is Min 0 and Max 30 Seconds
Motor Delay: 3 Motor Delay: this is the delay between
releasing deadmans button and switch off the
motor. Just to prevent that the motor switched
on/off too often.
↑↓ SEL to input 2/2 Range is Min 0 and Max 5 Seconds

7.4.4.4. HS CONTROL
Infrared signal Remark
Battery
HS Control High Speed button control
[Fuelling] [Fuelling]
○Before There are possible two options
●Before or During Before The user must press the HS control
button before the nozzle is lifted from the
dispenser
Before or during. The HS button can be
pressed either before or during the delivery

↑↓ SEL to input 1/1

Copyright  2015 Tokheim


TQC Service Manual V12.3 Page 88 of 226
7.4.4.5. PRESET
Infrared signal Remark
Battery
Preset Preset settings
[Preset Valve Type] There are 3 possible options for the preset valve type.
● Single Single (2-stage valve)
○ Parallel Parallel (standard)
○ None None
[Response Time] Depending on the valve response the TQC must switch sooner
or later to the low flow rate. Valve response time, range 5 - 100:
Normal Speed:15 Normal speed (~ 40 l/min flow-rate)
Low Speed: 2 Low speed (< 2 l/min flow-rate)
High Speed:20 High speed (80 l/min)
Very High Speed:40 Very high speed (> 80 l/min)
[Limits] Preset limits
Max Volume: 9900,00 Sets the max/min preset volume with comma.
Min Volume: 0002,00
Max Amount: 2000,00 Sets the max/min preset amount with comma.
Min Amount: 0002,00
[Local Preset Input]
Keypad Preset entry via Keypad (Is always possible), see below
□Button Preset entry via fixed value with buttons (see 7.4.4.5.1/p.90).
[Local Preset] When using local amount preset and volume * unit price does
Rounding not exactly match the preset amount, this will be rounded when
this option is checked.
↑↓ SEL to input 2/2

From TQC version 08.003 and newer, the local Preset input part of this menu has changed:

Menu option Physical connection per # key- Controlled PUMPs


number of PUMPs pads
[Local Preset Input] 1 2 3/4 connecte Keypad A Keypad B
PUM PUMP PUMPs d
P s
● No Keypad 0
○ Keypad A A
1
○ Single Keypad A A&B
A&B A B
○ Two Keypads 2
A&B A&B D&C
□Button Preset entry via fixed value with buttons (see 7.4.4.5.1/p.90)

Note: Different keypad layouts are used when there is 1 keypad assigned to 1 PUMP than when using 1 keypad
for 2 PUMPs. The last assignment defines 2 arrow-keys to select the PUMP the keypad is active for. Additional
menu options are used for keypad assignments to the pumps defined:

● Single Keypad One keypad for a 2-active hose dispenser


Left: Pump 1 Choose which pump should be activated when pressing the ‘left
Right: Pump 2 pump’ and ‘right pump’ keys.
● Two Keypads Two keypads for a 4-active hose dispenser
[First keypad] Primary keypad pump selection
Left : Pump 1 Choose which pump should be activated when pressing the ‘left
Right: Pump 2 pump’ and ‘right pump’ keys on the first keypad
[Second keypad] Secondary keypad pump selection
Left : Pump 3 Choose which pump should be activated when pressing the ‘left
Right: Pump 4 pump’ and ‘right pump’ keys on the second keypad

see paragraph 7.4.4.6/p.90 for the supported keypad layouts.

Copyright  2015 Tokheim


TQC Service Manual V12.3 Page 89 of 226
7.4.4.5.1. PRESET BUTTON MODE

Infrared signal Remark


Battery
Preset mode
[Value: 1 2 3] Select predefined values
Assign: 5 10 Button 1 is 5 Euro/litre, 2 is 10 and 3 is 20
20
[Preset mount]
○ Amount 3 buttons with fixed amount plus clear
○ Volume 3 buttons with fixed volume plus clear
○ Selectable 2 buttons with value 2 and 3 and 1 button to
toggle between volume/amount plus clear

↑↓ SEL to input
1/1

7.4.4.6. LOCAL PRESET INPUT


From TQC version 09.011 and newer, the local Preset input part of this menu has changed, depending on how
many filling positions the dispenser has.

Top part:

Single-Sided dispenser (V≥ 09):

Menu option Physical # key-pads Controlled PUMPs


Local Preset connect connected Keypad A Keypad B
[ Preset keypad to
Keypad ]
● No Keypad 0
○ Keypad A 1 A

Double-sided dispenser:

Menu option Physical # key-pads Controlled PUMPs


Local Preset connect connected Keypad A Keypad B
[ Preset keypad to
Keypad ]
● No Keypad 0
○ Single Keypad A 1 Free to
assign
○ Two Keypads A&B 2 A B

Double-sided dispenser (V10 and newer):

Menu option Physical # key-pads Controlled PUMPs


Local Preset connect connected Keypad A Keypad B
[ Preset keypad to
Keypad ]
● No Keypad 0
○ Single Keypad A 1 Free to
assign
○ One per pump A B
A&B 2
○ One per 2 pumps Free to assign

Copyright  2015 Tokheim


TQC Service Manual V12.3 Page 90 of 226
4-active hose dispenser:

Menu option Physical # key-pads Controlled PUMPs


Local Preset connect connected Keypad A Keypad B
[ Preset keypad to
Keypad ]
● No Keypad 0
○ Two Keypads A&B 2 Free to assign

4-active hose dispenser (V10 and newer):

Menu option Physical # key-pads Controlled PUMPs


Local Preset connect connected Keypad A Keypad B
[ Preset keypad to
Keypad ]
● No Keypad 0
○ One per 2 pumps A&B 2 Free to assign

Two keypad layouts can be used. Layout 1 can be used when there is 1 keypad assigned to 1 PUMP.
When using 1 keypad for 2 PUMPs, layout 2 is to be used. This layout 2 defines 2 arrow-keys to select the
PUMP the keypad controls. When the selection determines a fixed PUMP assignment per keypad, the arrow-
keys are inactive when using layout 2.

Middle part:

Additional menu options are used for keypad assignments:

● Keypad One keypad on a single-sided dispenser or


● Two Keypads Two keypads for a double-sided dispenser, up to V10, one per
● One per Pump pump
Two keypads for a double-sided dispenser, one per pump (≥
V10)
[Keypad] Choose: Keypad without Pump routing keys (layout 1) or Keypad
Layout 1 with inactive Pump routing keys (layout 2)

● Single Keypad One keypad for a double sided dispenser: layout 2


[Keypad] Choose which pump should be activated when pressing the ‘left
Left: Pump 1 pump’ and ‘right pump’ keys.
Right: Pump 2

● Two Keypads Two keypads for a 4-active hose dispenser: layout 2


● One per 2 pumps or two keypads for a 4-active hose dispenser: layout 2
● One per 2 pumps or double sided dispenser with pump selection keys: layout 2.

[First keypad] Primary keypad pump selection


Left : Pump 1 Choose which pump should be activated when pressing the ‘left
Right: Pump 2 pump’ and ‘right pump’ keys on the first keypad
[Second keypad] Secondary keypad pump selection
Left : Pump 3 Choose which pump should be activated when pressing the ‘left
Right: Pump 4 pump’ and ‘right pump’ keys on the second keypad

Copyright  2015 Tokheim


TQC Service Manual V12.3 Page 91 of 226
Note: for a double sided dispenser, only pump 1 and 2 can be chosen for both the first and second keypad.

Key assignments layout 1: 1 2 3 Preset


clear

4 5 6 Just
stop

7 8 9 Preset
amount

0 , Preset
volume

Key assignments layout 2:


1 2 3 Preset
clear

4 5 6 Preset
Volume

7 8 9 Preset
amount

< 0 , >

Note: When using this layout for 1 keypad per PUMP assignment, the PUMP selection keys are inactive.

Bottom part:
The next menu-part is always visible under the keypad setup, regardless of preset keypad settings:
[ Preset Preset entry via buttons. The menu below is only shown when
Button ] this option is checked:
□ Button
Value 1 2 3 Select predefined values
5 10 20 Button 1 is € 5 / liter, 2 is € 10 and 3 is € 20.
[Preset mount]
○ Amount 3 buttons with fixed amount plus clear
○ Volume 3 buttons with fixed volume plus clear
○ Selectable 2 buttons with value 2 and 3 and 1 button to toggle between
volume/amount plus clear

7.4.4.7. VALVE ERROR CONTROL


Infrared signal
Battery
Valve Error Control
[ Error Control ]
● Yes
○ No

↑↓ SEL to input 1/1


7.4.5. COMMUNICATION

Copyright  2015 Tokheim


TQC Service Manual V12.3 Page 92 of 226
Infrared signal Remark
Battery
Communication
1 CAN See 7.4.5.1/p.93
2 Network See 7.4.5.2/p.97
3 Comm Board See 7.4.5.3/p.97

4 IFSF See 7.4.5.4/p.98

5 Serial Port See 7.4.5.7/p.100 (Not available on EST)


↑↓ num, press
OK1/1

7.4.5.1. CAN
Infrared signal Remark
Battery
CAN
1 Auto Configuration See 7.4.5.1.1/p.93
2 Module Init See 7.4.5.1.2/p.96
3 Module Status See 7.4.5.1.3/p.96
4 Reset All Nodes When selecting option 4 all CAN nodes will be
reset
5 Last Auto Result Show last Auto Configure or Module Init result
screen, see also 7.4.5.1.1/p.93

↑↓ num, press OK1/1

7.4.5.1.1. AUTO CONFIGURATION


While doing the configuring the “X” will show the steps that are complete, the “-“ show what step(s) are currently
executed. All steps that do not have such a prefix symbol are to be performed still.

Once finished, then the following message will be shown: Completed steps may be hidden when the procedure
progresses to the end.

Infrared signal Remark


Battery
Configurating
X All operational
X Externals powered
X All default addr
X Switch all off
- Program Connector:
Specify mod IDs
SW Update Check Check if any device needs a software update
Retrieve Integrity This step is only done in warm-start and when
integrity checking is enabled.
Software Update This step is only done in warm-start and when at
least one CAN device has outdated software
Standby… 1/1

Copyright  2015 Tokheim


TQC Service Manual V12.3 Page 93 of 226
When software update is required:

Infrared signal Remark


Battery
Software Update CAN Software updating
HYM 3 51 UPD Device candidate for software updating (to be
performed still)
MPC A2 0C Device that is successfully software updated. OK
OK/CHK means that all operations for this device are
finished
MPC* A3* 14 CHK means that integrity checking is being
BSY performed
Device where software is being updated at this
moment.

Standby… 3/3

Note: The order of software updating is not necessarily from top to bottom.
(*) CAN device and the address.

Infrared signal Remark


Battery
Configuration Result Auto Configuration
MPC A1 04 OK It shows the status of the results for detected
MPC A2 0C OK potential CAN device, the CAN address of the
MPC A3 14 OK device and the configuration status (see below).
MPC A4 1C OK The devices that have problems are stated at the
MPC A5 24 OK start of the list.
MPC B1 05 OK
MPC B2 0D OK

↑↓ C to return 3/3

For TQC there is functionality to detect & reprogram not used HYMs and pulsers.

When a new dispenser is deliverd there shouldn’t be unused hardware in it.

Copyright  2015 Tokheim


TQC Service Manual V12.3 Page 94 of 226
51 xx [WAR] Failed to put on the external power of a CAN connector on device xx.
Ext power xx [WAR] Caution, all devices connected to that device are likely not to be auto-
Failed configured.
Device xx will probably be auto-configured itself, therefore it can have a
different address now. It’s best to lookup the device type belonging to this
address and check the connections / software version.
Request 0 [ERR] TQC ARM9 Inter-process communication failed, try to start the auto-
number of 0 [ERR] configure method again. If this problem persists, call the service
connects 0 [ERR] department.
Failed 0 [ERR]
Unknown xx [WAR] Device xx reported an unknown default address yy. This likely when the
def A yy xx [WAR] device is not yet (fully) supported by the current TQC ARM9 software, this
device type will probably be skipped in auto-configuration, maybe leaving
chain-connected devices not configured as well. Please report this error to
the service department.
Unused 02 [WAR] A pulser is connected on a not used HYM position. Check all HYMs for
MPC found 02 [WAR] pulsers connected at not powered (pulser power LED on HYM is off)
connectors, unplug & unmount this pulser. Check if some pulser in the
result comes with result ‘ERR’ denoting this pulser might need to be
connected at that position.
Unexpectd xx [WAR] A HYM is connected on a not used HYM position. Letter y tells where this
HYM_y xx [WAR] HYM is positioned. Both pulser outputs will not be powered (pulser power
LED on HYM is off) after auto-configuration. Unmount this HYM and
anything connected to it.
Multiple in 7A [ERR] One or Multiple devices are detected to be in Boot mode. Check the rest of
Bootmode 7A [ERR] the list which device(s) report state N/A. This / these device(s) are subject
1 Device in 7A [ERR] to be in boot mode. This problem cannot be resolved by TQC software,
Bootmode 7A [ERR] resolve by replacement of these parts.

The status per device can be:

“OK” : Programming OK
“ERR” : Error in programming the specified device, the device failed to assume the requested address.
“MOD” : Timeout in programming the module ID for a device (no response)
“PWR” : Timeout in switching on / off the power to a CAN connector. This is typically the case for
configured HYMs that are not present on the CAN bus.
“N/A” : Unresponsive device during programming. Maybe a pulser has no operational software or the
CAN bus is not well terminated.
“VER” : When a dynamic addressable device did not respond to the set address PDO message, while it
is in operational state on the CAN bus (stating that the device software-version is probably outdated).
“INT” : This device is fully CAN auto-configured but causes an integrity problem. Devices with this
result can be clicked on to get to the Integrity unblock menu (sub-menu of Dispenser Status menu) to see
details and unblock the situation.
“SWU” : Software update of this device failed. This can result in this device being in bootloader mode.
“OSW” : Software of this device is outdated but not updated in this auto-configure session because
another device’s software update failed and this might result in that device being in bootloader mode.

Copyright  2015 Tokheim


TQC Service Manual V12.3 Page 95 of 226
7.4.5.1.2. MODULE INIT

Infrared signal Remark


Battery
Module Init
[ Type ] [ Type ]
Pulser Select the type of CAN device, e.g.:
[Name] Pulser,Display
MPC_A1 [Name]
Select one of the available CAN devices for the
Address:04 [type] selected
Start to Setup Address: This is pre-defined, initially the actual
address is shown, when sub-menu is selected
the only one possible address is given
↑↓ SEL to input Start to setup : Start configuration
1/1

Start to setup

Infrared signal Remark


Battery
Configuring While doing the configuring the “X” will show the
X All operational status of the processes being done at that
X Externals powered moment, otherwise shows “-“. Once finished ,
X All default addr then the following message will be shown, in this
X Switch all off case for Pulser configuration
- Program Connector:
MPC A1 04 [OK]

Standby… 1/1

7.4.5.1.3. MODULE STATUS

Infrared signal Remark


Battery
Module Status
[ Module ] [Module]
Pre-Processor Select applicable module *
Node Node Status: It shows the status of the Node
Status:NO_ERROR Node Reset: Resets the Node
Node Reset

↑↓ SEL to input 1/1

(*) e.g.: VCC_AB, Display_B_Master,MPC_B4 to MPC_B1, Display_A_Master, MPC_A4 to MPC_A1, HYM_4 to


HYM_1, Slave_IO, Comm_Board_IFSF, Pre_Processor and IO Board.

Copyright  2015 Tokheim


TQC Service Manual V12.3 Page 96 of 226
7.4.5.2. NETWORK
Infrared signal Remark
Battery
Network
[ IP Address ] [ IP Address ]
192.168.1.5 Fill in TQC TCP /IP Address.
[ Subnet Mask ] [ Subnet Mask ]
255.255.240.0 Fill in TQC Subnet Mask.
[ Gateway ]
[ Gateway ]
Fill in TQC Gateway.
192.168.1.1
After an IP change a reboot is required
to let TQC obtain the new IP address.
SEL to input 1/1

7.4.5.3. COMM BOARD


Infrared signal Remark
Battery
Comm Board
1 Node Address See 7.4.5.3.1/p.97
2 Point to Point See 7.4.5.3.2/p.98

↑↓ num, press OK1/1

7.4.5.3.1. NODE ADDRESS

Infrared signal Remark


Battery
Node Address
Node: 0 Set the node’s address. Range is Min 0 and Max 64

SEL to input 1/1

Note: When using TCP / IP communication node must be filled in, in this menu and in IFSF network menu (see
7.4.5.6/p.99).

Copyright  2015 Tokheim


TQC Service Manual V12.3 Page 97 of 226
7.4.5.3.2. POINT TO POINT

Infrared signal Remark


Battery
P2P Settings
[Node Address] Range is Min 0 and Max 64
Pump 1 : 0 Node address is implicitly set to 1
Pump 2 : 0
[UDC ID] Only shown for UDC protocol
Pump 1 : 96 96: Default, less than 5 products
Pump 2 : 96 92: 5 products (or more)
36: CEM44 site controller compatibility

SEL to input 1/2

Infrared signal Remark


Battery
P2P Settings
[POS Timeout] Only shown for UDC protocol .
10 sec Default value 10 sec, Min 1 sec & Max 60 sec.
[Running Trans Freq] Only shown for UDC protocol.
20 tenth of sec Default value 20 tenth of sec.
Min 0 tenth of sec and max 255 tent of sec.
[Use Address] Only shown for NUP protocol
Default value is YES
Yes: A fixed address is used to communicate with POS.
● Yes The P2P Node address is used for this.
○ No NO: the address is to communicate with POS is not
fixed, it will be requested from POS.
Only shown for UDC protocol
[Pre Authorize] Default is Disabled
●Disabled
○Enabled

SEL to input 2/2

7.4.5.4. IFSF
Infrared signal Remark
Battery
IFSF
1 IFSF Configuration see 7.4.5.5/p.99
2 IFSF Network see 7.4.5.6/p.99

SEL to input 1/1

Copyright  2015 Tokheim


TQC Service Manual V12.3 Page 98 of 226
7.4.5.5. IFSF CONFIGURATION
Infrared signal Remark
Battery
IFSF Configuration IFSF Configuration
[ Interface Mode ] [ Interface Mode ]
● Comm Board
○ TCP /IP Select IFSF via Comm Board or via TCP / IP

SEL to input 1/1

Note: When TCP / IP is selected the menu below will not be visible.
In case TCP/IP is selected the following menu will be displayed.

Infrared signal Remark


Battery
IFSF Configuration IFSF Configuration
[ Interface Mode ] [ Interface Mode ]
○Comm Board
● TCP /IP Select IFSF via Comm Board or via TCP / IP.
[ TCP / IP Setting ]
Node Addr: 1
Subnet Addr: 2
See 8.9/p.166
HB Port: 3486
Server Port: 5000
SEL to input 1/1

7.4.5.6. IFSF NETWORK


Infrared signal Remark
Battery
IFSF Network IFSF Network
[ IP Address ]
192.168.242.224 Set POS TCP / IP address
[ Subnet Mask ]
255.255.240.0
[ Gateway ]
192.168.242.1 See 8.9/p.166

SEL to input 1/1

7.4.5.6.1. IP-ADDRESSING
Below a background is given on the “TQC IP addressing” used in the Fuel-Pos.

A Fuel-Pos can connect up to 7 systems into one network.

Every system can have:


- one IP-Address reserved for the Media Server.
- 32 IP addresses for calculators, for IFSF over TCP/IP a separate IP-address is used.
- 32 IP addresses for TQC-VGA which is 2 per calculator.

The above means that every TQC occupies two address one for TQC itself and one for the IFSF protocol. So on
one system only 16 TQC’s with IFSF can be connected in a system.

The Fuel-Pos supports 32 TQC addresses per system. In practice only 16 will be used, which could end up in
64 filling positions (4 active hoses). This makes no sense, so it is defined that up to 32 TQC-VGAs can be
installed; this is 1 per filling position and makes 32 filling positions.

Copyright  2015 Tokheim


TQC Service Manual V12.3 Page 99 of 226
When this is not enough, the next system must be selected.

SystemNr Device Ip Address (from) Ip Address (to)


T-MEDIA 192.168.242.10
IFSF1 to IFSF16 192.168.242.224 192.168.242.239
1
TQC1 to TQC 16 192.168.242.240 192.168.242.255
VGA1 to VGA32 192.168.243.0 192.168.243. 31
T-MEDIA 192.168.244.10
IFSF1 to IFSF32 192.168.244.224 192.168.244.255
2
TQC 1 to TQC 16 192.168.244.240 192.168.244.255
VGA1 to VGA32 192.168.245.0 192.168.245. 31
T-MEDIA 192.168.246.10
IFSF1 to IFSF32 192.168.246.224 192.168.246.255
3
TQC1 to TQC16 192.168.246.240 192.168.246.255
VGA1 to VGA32 192.168.247.0 192.168.247. 31
T-MEDIA 192.168.248.10
IFSF1 to IFSF32 192.168.248.224 192.168.248.255
4
TQC1 to TQC16 192.168.248.240 192.168.248.255
VGA1 to VGA32 192.168.249.0 192.168.249. 31
T-MEDIA 192.168.250.10
IFSF1 to IFSF32 192.168.250.224 192.168.250.255
5
TQC1 to TQC16 192.168.250.240 192.168.250.255
VGA1 to VGA32 192.168.251.0 192.168.251. 31
T-MEDIA 192.168.252.10
IFSF1 to IFSF32 192.168.252.224 192.168.252.255
6
TQC1 to TQC16 192.168.252.240 192.168.252.255
VGA1 to VGA32 192.168.253.0 192.168.253. 31
T-MEDIA 192.168.254.10
IFSF1 to IFSF32 192.168.254.224 192.168.255.255
7
TQC1 to TQC16 192.168.254.240 192.168.254.255
VGA1 to VGA32 192.168.255.0 192.168.255. 31

7.4.5.7. SERIAL PORT SETUP


These are settings the RS-232 port above the APB board. Single-Twin main boards do not have a RS232
connector fitted.

Infrared signal Remark


Battery
Serial Port
[Mode]
STANDALONE Select the protocol that is to be used on the
COM-port:
STANDALONE (do not use)
DVRC2 / Fafnir VR monitoring protocol, detailed
settings can be adjusted in the VR menu (see
/p.116)
RM_CONTROL allows the Remote server tool to
perform some diagnostics actions via the serial
port (rather than the UTP port). This is required
for some South-American markets.
HHT_CABLE allows connecting the HHT to the
RS-232 port for improved connectivity compared
to IrDA.
↑↓ SEL to input 1/1 Use a Tokheim certified cross-cable to connect

Copyright  2015 Tokheim


TQC Service Manual V12.3 Page 100 of 226
7.4.6. TIMER

7.4.6.1. MAXIMUM DELIVERY TIMER


There are two maximum delivery timers. One for normal speed (40/80 liter/min) and one for high speed (130
litre/min). This time is the maximum time the pump motor can be active, it starts when the nozzle is taken out of
the nozzle boot

7.4.6.2. MAX DELIVERY TIMER LOW


Default 900 seconds, range 0 – 2550 seconds.

7.4.6.2.1. MAX DELIVERY TIMER HIGH


Default 2550 seconds, range 0 – 2550 seconds.

7.4.6.3. SUSPEND TIMER


Within this time a filling has to be started (released via payment terminal), or continued (satellite). When this
time is passed the filling is ended. To use the dispenser for a filling it has to be released again. The local
parameter setting for this value can be overruled by the controller. Maximum is 180 seconds

7.4.6.4. LOW NO FILLING TIMER


This functionality concerns a ‘hydraulic time out’, which is used to detect the end of the flow.

After switching off the motor/valves, the flow does not end immediately because of the system characteristics. If
no pulses are detected during this ‘low no filling time’, then a so-called “end of the flow” message is generated.
If pulse(s) are detected the time out is restarted. The value of the ‘low no filling time’ is typically 0.5 seconds
and cannot be altered.

7.4.6.5. INTER-DELIVERY TIMER


This is the minimum time to elapse between successive 2 fillings.
Minimum 1 second, maximum 255 seconds.

7.4.6.6. MAXIMUM TIME OF NO FLOW MENU


Maximum allowed period between powering the pump motor and the detection of fuel flow or timeout after fuel
flow stops. If no flow is detected the pump motor is switched off.

7.4.6.7. NO ACTION TIMER


Maximum time of no user interaction on the HHT. Once this timer is elapsed the HHT session will be terminated.
Value 0 will disable this timer mechanism and the menu session needs to be closed explicitly (choosing quit
from the main menu) at all times. Default 120 seconds, minimum 30 seconds, maximum 255 seconds.

7.4.6.8. WAIT PRESET BUTTON TIMER


Maximum time of no user interaction on the local preset buttons. If this timer is elapsed an ongoing local preset
selection is terminated. The display is restored according to the active idle display control setting.
Default 60 seconds, minimum 30 seconds, maximum 255 seconds.

Copyright  2015 Tokheim


TQC Service Manual V12.3 Page 101 of 226
7.4.6.9. BATTERY TEST TIMER
Time between each successive battery test.

Infrared signal Remark


Battery
Timer These are settings for timers used in the system.
[ Max delivery Low ] Maximum time for a delivery at 40 lpm.
0*10 sec Range is Min 0 and Max 255 seconds
[ Max delivery High ] Maximum time for a delivery at 130lpm.
255*10sec Range is Min 0 and Max 255 * 10 seconds
[ Suspended ] Maximum time a filling can be suspended
60*sec Range is Min 0 and Max 180 seconds
[ Inter-Delivery ] Minimum time between two deliveries.
0* sec Range is Min 0 and Max 255 seconds
↑↓ SEL to input 1/2

Infrared signal Remark


Battery
Timer
[ Max No Flow] Maximum time that no flow is detected after
60 *sec filling is started. After this time transaction is
closing.
Range is Min 0 and Max 255 seconds
[No Action] Range is Min 0 and Max 255 seconds
60*sec
[Wait preset button ] Maximum time of no activity on the local preset
60 *sec buttons. After that the display is updated
according the idle display control and local
preset is reset.
Range is Min 30 and Max 255 seconds.
[Battery Check ] Time between two successive battery checks,
1*min performed by diagnostic manager.
Range is Min 1 and Max 60 minutes
↑↓ SEL to input 2/2

7.4.7. FRAUD PROTECTION


Infrared signal Remark
Battery
Fraud Protection Fraud Protection
Max Zero Trans: 7 Max Zero Trans:
Default value is 7. This is the max times that user
may lift up a nozzle without making any
transaction. After 7 zero deliveries the filling
position will be blocked.
[Connect Protection] [Connect Protection]
●Disabled Not yet implemented
○Enabled

↑↓ SEL to input 1/1

Copyright  2015 Tokheim


TQC Service Manual V12.3 Page 102 of 226
7.4.8. OPTIONAL FUNCTIONS
The following optional functions are available. They can be selected by scrolling through the various items with
the up and down keys.

• PIN bypass (see 7.4.8.1/p.103).


• Monitor Tank Level (see 7.4.8.2/p.103).
• Push to Start (see 7.4.8.3/p.104).
• Product name display (see 7.4.8.4/p.104).
• Just Stop (see 7.4.8.5/p.104).
• Dispenser light (see 7.4.8.6/p.105).
• Indication Light (see 7.4.8.7/p.105).
• Idle Display (see 0/p.106).
• Satellite (see 0/p.109).
• Audio (see 7.4.8.10/p.109).
• Car at Pump (see 7.4.8.11/p.110).
• Product Buzzer (see 0/p.111).

7.4.8.1. PIN BYPASS


Infrared signal Remark
Battery
Optional Functions
[Function] [Function]
PIN Bypass Disable PIN:
●Disabled It is possible to disable or enable the PIN access
○Enabled in the TQC system when entering in the Hand
Held Terminal.

↑↓ SEL to input 1/1

7.4.8.2. MONITOR TANK LEVEL


Infrared signal Remark
Battery
Optional Functions
[Function] [Function]
Monitor Tank Level Monitor Tank Level.
●Disabled With this option, it is possible to monitor the Tank
○Enabled level of the fuels. Depending on status of tank
level input decide to allow a transaction or not.

↑↓ SEL to input 1/1

Copyright  2015 Tokheim


TQC Service Manual V12.3 Page 103 of 226
7.4.8.3. PUSH TO START
Infrared signal Remark
Battery
Optional Functions
[Function] [Function]
Push to Start It is used for some countries where before start
●Disabled tanking a button needs to be pressed in order to
○Enabled start making the delivery to the car. Timeout for
push to start set in LPG menu (LPG nozzle
timeout) (see 7.4.4.3/p.88)

↑↓ SEL to input 1/1

7.4.8.4. PRODUCT NAME DISPLAY


Infrared signal Remark
Battery
Optional Functions
[Function] [Function]
Prod Name Display This option gives to the user a possibility to
●Disabled display the product name.
○ Enabled, Details Don’t enable when TQC-VGA display is used.

↑↓ SEL to input 1/1

When Product name is enabled,

Infrared signal Remark


Battery
Prod Name Display

Prod. Display:2 Time to display the product name in seconds.

↑↓ num, press OK1/1

7.4.8.5. JUST STOP


Infrared signal Remark
Battery
Optional Functions Optional Functions
[Function] [Function]
Just Stop Functionality is to preset up at next round
●Disabled amount value
○ Enabled, Details
If the setting is Enabled the preset-clear button is
↑↓ SEL to input 1/1 handled as a Just-Stop button during a delivery.

Copyright  2015 Tokheim


TQC Service Manual V12.3 Page 104 of 226
When Just stop enabled:

Infrared signal Remark


Battery
Just Stop
[Rounding Mode] Rounding mode, three options
●0
○1
○2

↑↓ num, press OK1/1

7.4.8.6. DISPENSER LIGHT


Infrared signal Remark
Battery
Optional Functions
[Function] [Function]
Dispenser Light It is the LCD backlights are switched on during
●Disabled night time.
○ Enabled, Details

↑↓ SEL to input 1/1

When Dispenser light enabled:

Infrared signal Remark


Battery
Dispenser Light
[Control Mode]
●Default
○Application When selecting Application, Dispenser Light is
controlled by POS system

↑↓ num, press OK1/1

7.4.8.7. INDICATION LIGHT


Infrared signal Remark
Battery
Optional Functions
[Function] [Function]
Indication Light Indication Light ( also called OPT / PTO / Traffic )
●Disabled Based on request of controller switch an output
○ Enabled to be able to switch an Indication light.

No control of the indication light can be done by


TQC or by POS.

↑↓ SEL to input 1/1

Copyright  2015 Tokheim


TQC Service Manual V12.3 Page 105 of 226
Infrared signal Remark
Battery
Optional Functions
[Function] [Function]
Indication Light Indication Light ( also called OPT / PTO / Traffic )
○Disabled Based on request of controller switch an output
●Enabled to be able to switch an Indication light.

The indication light can be controlled by TQC or


by POS

↑↓ SEL to input 1/1

Infrared signal Remark


Battery
Indication Light
[Control Mode] Default = Controlled by TQC.
●Default Application = Controlled by POS
○ Application
Mode: 0 Mode 0:
Light on when transaction is started
Light off when transaction is cancelled or
terminated
Mode 1:
Light on when transaction is started
Light off when transaction is cancelled or cashed.
Mode 2:
Light on when transaction is started
Light blink when transaction is terminated
Light off when transaction is cancelled or cashed.
Mode 3: Reserved
Mode 4: Reserved

NB: mode 1 and 2 not to be used in combination


with IFSF and Nb_Tran_buffer_Not_Paid higher
than 1.
↑↓ num, press OK1/1

Infrared signal Remark


Battery
Indication Light
[Control Mode]
○Default Default = Controlled by TQC.
●Application Application = Controlled by POS

The control of the indication light will be done via


the POS (as per IFSF standard):

↑↓ num, press OK1/1

Remark: if more filling positions are used the setting made in the HHT counts for all filling positions.

Copyright  2015 Tokheim


TQC Service Manual V12.3 Page 106 of 226
7.4.8.8. IDLE DISPLAY
Infrared signal Remark
Battery
Optional Functions
[Function] [Function]
Idle Display Idle Display
●Disabled Determines which information is on the display
○ Enabled, Details whenever the dispenser is idle. Various options
can be selected when the idle display is enabled.

↑↓ SEL to input 1/1

When Idle display enabled:

Infrared signal Remark


Battery
Idle Display
[Control Mode] When idle display Timer is elapsed:
●Default Default = Controlled by TQC.
○Application Application = Controlled by POS
Mode: 0 See 0/p.108 for details on the various operating
modes.
Timer: 10 Time between nozzle down and the idle-display
to be shown, in seconds.

↑↓ num, press OK1/1

Copyright  2015 Tokheim


TQC Service Manual V12.3 Page 107 of 226
7.4.8.8.1. IDLE DISPLAY MODES

Idle Display Parameter


Function Control Operating Timer Remarks
Mode Mode
disabled N/A N/A N/A Timer is fixed to default, can only be changed
when the function is enabled. This mode is to be
used when the previous delivery needs always to
be displayed.
enabled Default 0 when the timer is elapsed :
Amount : 0000,00
Volume : 0000,00
Unit Price : 000,0
enabled Default 1 when the timer is elapsed :
Amount : xxxx,xx
Volume : yyyy,yy
Unit Price : zzz,z or (see Event description
below)
Default: Amount : xxxx,xx
10. Volume : yyyy,yy
Unit Price : 000,0
enabled Default 2 Can be when the timer is elapsed :
set from Amount : 0000,00
0 to 60. Volume : 0000,00
Unit Price : xxx,x (current UP)
enabled Default 3 when the timer is elapsed :
Amount : xxxx,xx
Volume : yyyy,yy
Unit Price : zzz,z
or (see Event description below)
Amount : 0000,00
Volume : 0000,00
Unit Price : zzz,z
enabled Applicati 0 When POS sends clear display
on or TQC state is STARTED or AUTHORISED
Amount : 0000,00
Volume : 0000,00
Unit Price : 000,0
enabled Applicati 1 When POS sends clear display
on or TQC state is STARTED or AUTHORISED
N/A Amount : xxxx,xx
Volume : yyyy,yy
Unit Price : zzz,z
enabled Applicati 2 When POS sends clear display
on or TQC state is STARTED or AUTHORISED
Amount : 0000,00
Volume : 0000,00
Unit Price : xxx,x (current UP)

Copyright  2015 Tokheim


TQC Service Manual V12.3 Page 108 of 226
7.4.8.9. SATELLITE
Infrared signal Remark
Battery
Optional Functions
[Function] [Function]
Satellite Dispenser which acts as a Master or Slave. It
●Disabled can contain display and slave nozzles for the
○ Enabled, Details main TQC. “Slave TQC “

↑↓ SEL to input 1/1

When Satellite enabled:

Infrared signal Remark


Battery
Satellite
[Control Mode] Two modes are possible Default and Application
●Default
○Application
[Start at Nozzle] Indicate which nozzle can start a delivery.
●Master or Slave
○ Only Master
○ Only Slave

↑↓ num, press OK1/1

7.4.8.10.AUDIO
Infrared signal Remark
Battery
Optional Functions
[Function] [Function]
Audio Option to switch on/off sound
●Disabled
○ Enabled, Details

↑↓ SEL to input 1/1

When Audio enabled:


Infrared signal Remark
Battery
Audio Function
[Product Sentence] The sentence is different product name.
Pump:1
Nozzle:1
Sentence:46
[Left Audio Voice]
○ Female
● Male
[Right Audio Voice]
↑↓ num, press OK1/3

Copyright  2015 Tokheim


TQC Service Manual V12.3 Page 109 of 226
Infrared signal Remark
Battery
● Female
○ Male
[Left Audio Volume] The volume has five levels, OFF, the first to
fourth
Day: Fourth Level level
Night: Fourth Level
[Right Audio Volume]
Day: Fourth Level
Night: Fourth Level
↑↓ num, press OK2/3

Infrared signal Remark


Battery
[Effective Time]
Day Value:9 When the day time reaches, the audio volume
uses the
Night Value:20 Day value conversely uses the night value.

↑↓ num, press OK3/3

7.4.8.11.CAR AT PUMP
Infrared signal Remark
Battery
Car at Pump Optional Function Car at Pump
●Disabled Generic enable / disable switch
○ Enabled, Details

↑↓ SEL to input 1/1

When Enabled:

Infrared signal Remark


Battery
Car at Pump
[Pump Enabled]
 Pump 1 Pump 1: Car at Pump is enabled.
Process Delay: 2 Processing delay [1..99]. default = 2 sec.
Wait for Cust: 15 Wait for Customer [0..999], default = 15 sec.
Max CAP State: 60 Max “CarAtPump” state active time [1..999],
default=60 sec.
 Pump 2 Pump 2: Car at Pump is enabled.
Process Delay: 2 Processing delay [1..99]. default = 2 sec.
Wait for Cust: 15 Wait for Customer [0..999], default = 15 sec.
Max CAP State: 60 Max “CarAtPump” state active time [1..999],
default=60 sec.
↑↓ SEL to input 2/2

Copyright  2015 Tokheim


TQC Service Manual V12.3 Page 110 of 226
7.4.8.12.PRODUCT BUZZER

Infrared signal Remark


Battery
Product Buzzer
●Disabled Generic enable / disable switch
○ Enabled, Details

↑↓ SEL to input 1/1

When Enabled:

Infrared Remark
signal Battery
Product Buzzer Setup for which products a buzzer should sound
Buzz time: 15 Buzzer sound time (in seconds)
 Product 1 Select on which product the buzzer should be
 Product 2 activated (product name is shown per line)
 Product 3
 Product 4
 Product 5
 Product 6
 Product 7
 Product 8
↑↓ SEL to input 1/1

Note: the GPIO for keypad buzzer will be used for this function. When a key is pressed on the keypad (when
connected) also the buzzer will sound. See IO setups drawings (Figure 14).

7.4.8.13.FLOW DETECTION
Infrared signal Remark
Battery
Optional Functions
[Function] [Function]
Flow Detection Option to switch on/off flow detection
●Disabled
○ Enabled, Details

↑↓ SEL to input 1/1

When Audio enabled:

Infrared signal Remark


Battery
Flow Detection
[Max Flow Rate]
Normal Speed:35
High Speed:60
Very High Speed:90
Continuous times:5

↑↓ num, press OK1/1

Copyright  2015 Tokheim


TQC Service Manual V12.3 Page 111 of 226
7.4.9. PROD CONFIGURATION
Infrared signal Remark
Battery
Prod Configuration Prod Configuration
Prod: 1 Prod: Selects 1 to 8
Name: Product 1 Name: name of product (as defined in Name
tables)
Intern Num: 1 Intern: Numbers (Used inside the TQC itself) for
identifying the different fuels (read only)
Extern Num: 0 Extern: Numbers (Used outside the TQC itself)
used by a POS to identify fuels

↑↓ SEL to input 1/1

7.4.10. NAME TABLES


Infrared signal Remark
Battery
Name Tables
1 Product See 7.4.10.1/p.112
2 Fuel Type See 7.4.10.2/p.113
3 Customer See 7.4.10.3/p.113

↑↓ num, press OK1/1

7.4.10.1.PRODUCT
Infrared signal Remark
Battery
Product Name
1 Product 1 l In total there are 8 products in this selection.
2 Product 2 Product 1 to Product 8
3 Product 3
4 Product 4 Press # to change to alphanumeric entrance
5 Product 5 ( Example for E press # and 3 times key 3 )
6 Product 6
7 Product 7 Remark: When product name display with LCD
8 Product 8 display is enabled, check if alphanumeric
SEL to input 1/1 characters can be displayed on 7 segment LCD
display.

Copyright  2015 Tokheim


TQC Service Manual V12.3 Page 112 of 226
7.4.10.2.FUEL TYPE
Infrared signal Remark
Battery
Fuel Type Name Fuel Type Name
1 Unleaded 95 The different types of fuel to be setup
2 Unleaded 98 Normally used for temperature compensation
3 Diesel to select the appropriate density
4 Gasoil
5 LPG Press # to change to alphanumeric entrance
6 Leaded 98 ( Example for E press # and 3 times key 3 )

SEL to input 1/1

7.4.10.3.CUSTOMER
Infrared signal Remark
Battery
Customer Name
1 Agip Diesel
2 BP
3 Esso Press # to change to alphanumeric entrance
4 Repsol ( Example for E press # and 3 times key 3 )
5 Shell
6 Tamoil
7 Texaco
8 Tokheim
9 Total
10 Omega
11 Free programmable
12 Free programmable
13 Free programmable
14 Free programmable
15 Free programmable
↑↓ SEL to input 3/3

7.4.11. RESERVED

7.4.12. RESERVED

Copyright  2015 Tokheim


TQC Service Manual V12.3 Page 113 of 226
7.4.13. METER CALIBRATION
Note: If EC is disabled (see 0/p.132) this menu item won’t be shown, as a result Vapour recovery and following
menu items under 4 Configuration will shift up one line.

Infrared signal Remark


Battery
Meter Calibration Meter Calibration
[Pump] 1 Pump: Selects one of the available PUMPs
[Product] Prod: Product “x” is a default product name, once
Product 1 the name is defined differently it will appear that
way, i.e like “Diesel”.
[Can Volume] Volume that the calibration can measure
0020,00 accurately

Start Delivery Start Delivery: Controls the real delivery of the


TQC nozzle. Thereafter the user is guided to a
sequence of entries via which the “K-factor”
(electronic calibration factor) will be calculated.
↑↓ SEL to input 1/1

By default a preset delivery will be performed with as preset volume the specified Can Volume.
The menu will notify the user when no preset delivery is possible.

Note: When additive products are defined, these products are excluded for EC deliveries since the meter
should only be calibrated for the pure fuel product. Additive products can therefore not be selected from the
product selection.

Infrared signal Remark


Battery
Meter Calibration Meter Calibration
Pump: 1 Pump number
Prod: Product 1 Product “x” is a default product name, once the name is
[Display line setup] defined differently it will appear that way, i.e like “Diesel”.
Top: Net Volume What delivery metric to show on which line of the CSD
Bottom: Raw Volume (this can be different from what is displayed for real
UP: Max Flowrate deliveries).

Pick nozzle to start


Controls the real EC delivery of the TQC nozzle.
↑↓ C for ECal setup 1/1 Thereafter the user is guided to a sequence of entries via
which the “K-factor” (electronic calibration factor) will be
calculated.

Copyright  2015 Tokheim


TQC Service Manual V12.3 Page 114 of 226
An EC test delivery will take place where temperature compensation is temporary disabled
(when applicable). After the EC test delivery has taken place:

Infrared signal Remark


Battery
Meter Calibration Meter Calibration
Pump: 1 PUMP: Selects one of the available PUMPs
Prod: Product 1 Prod: product indication the delivery was
performed on
Net Vol: 20,01 Volume that matches the volume stated on the
CSD, compensated using the current EC factor
(only shown in V 07.005.02 and newer).
Raw Vol: 20,05 Volume measured without any (EC or TC)
compensation. This volume and the Can volume
is used for the EC compensation K factor
calculation
Can Vol: 20,00 Volume that has actually been poured in the
calibration can. You need to readout this volume
on the Can and fill it in here.
Cur K Factor: 1,0019 Current EC compensation factor
Seal switch:Sealed Current status of the seal switch on the HYM
where this pulser connects to
Calibrate Menu option to calibrate the new K factor based
↑↓ SEL to input 1/1 on the entered Can volume

After the current Can volume has been entered, you can choose to calibrate. The screen will then show the new
K factor based on raw volume and the can volume entered. When the factor deviates too much, the notification
will show to replace the meter since its accuracy is compromised.
When the deviation in factor is within limits, the seal-switch of the selected meter needs to be unsealed and
sealed back when the menu tells you to do so.

7.4.14. VAPOUR RECOVERY


Note: If EC is disabled (see 0/p.132) this menu item and following menu items under 4 Configuration will shift up
one line.

Infrared signal Remark


Battery
Vapour Recovery
1 Settings See 7.4.14.1/p.116
2 Calibration See 7.4.14.2/p.116

↑↓ num, press OK1/1

Copyright  2015 Tokheim


TQC Service Manual V12.3 Page 115 of 226
7.4.14.1.SETTINGS
Infrared signal Remark
Battery
Settings
1 Hardware Mode See 7.4.14.1.1/p.116
2 Communication Mode See 7.4.14.1.2/p.116
3 Nozzle Config See 7.4.14.1.3/p.117
4 VR Return Per Prod See 7.4.14.1.4/p.117
5 Efficiency See 7.4.14.1.5/p.117
6 Gaz Meter See 7.4.14.1.6/p.118
7 Calibration Params See 7.4.14.1.7/p.118
8 Err Params See 7.4.14.1.8/p.118
↑↓ num, press OK1/1

7.4.14.1.1. HARDWARE MODE

Infrared signal Remark


Battery
Hardware Mode Hardware Mode
●OL OL: Open Loop
○SCG SCG: Self Calibrating Gas. This is more accurate
than the OL and requires a VCC device to
measure vapour flow & volume
[Pump 2 Motor] When using a double-sided dispenser and the
motor connector of the SIO is not in use by
Hydraulics (e.g LPG LM2 setup), the option
where to connect the B-side VR motor is
available as:
●Main Board Connect to main board (one motor for 2 sides,
shared use)
○SIO Connect to the motor output of the AUX motor
connector of the SIO
↑↓ SEL to input 1/1

7.4.14.1.2. COMMUNICATION MODE

Infrared signal Remark


Battery
Communication Communication
[Mode]
STANDALONE Option to select D-VCR2 communication
[PUMP 1/2 address] Address must be unique for each dispenser.
0 ( One address will handle two PUMPs at most)

Note: For V10 onwards, PUMP will be replaced


by Pump for standardization of naming

↑↓ SEL to input 1/1

Copyright  2015 Tokheim


TQC Service Manual V12.3 Page 116 of 226
7.4.14.1.3. NOZZLE CONFIG

Infrared signal Remark


Battery
Nozzle Config
[ PUMP: 1 2 3 In this menu you define which nozzles are
4] subject to vapour recovery. Layout depends on
PR1 □ □ - - selected number of PUMPs and product.
PR2 □ □ - -
PR3 □ □ - - Note: For V10 onwards, PUMP will be replaced
PR4 □ □ - - by Pump for standardization of naming
PR5 - - - -
PR6 - - - -
PR7 - - - -
PR8 - - - -
↑↓ SEL to input 2/2

7.4.14.1.4. VR RETURN PER PRODUCT

Infrared signal Remark


Battery
VR Return Per Prod
○Enable Enabling this function will route the vapour of a
●Disable product back via the correct valves to the
appropriate UST.

↑↓ SEL to input 1/1

7.4.14.1.5. EFFICIENCY

Infrared signal Remark


Battery
Efficiency
[ PUMP: 1 2 3
4] Density difference of vapour compared to air.
PR1 107 107 --- - Whereby the 107 is the typical % used in the
-- efficiency on fuels. These parameters can slightly
PR2 107 107 --- - be changed according to other fuels.
--
PR3 107 107 --- - Note: For V10 onwards, PUMP will be replaced
-- by Pump for standardization of naming
PR4 107 107 --- -
--
PR5 --- --- --- -
--
PR6 --- --- --- -
--
PR7 --- --- --- -
--
PR8 --- --- --- -
--
↑↓ SEL to input 2/2

Copyright  2015 Tokheim


TQC Service Manual V12.3 Page 117 of 226
7.4.14.1.6. GAZ METER

Infrared signal Remark


Battery
Gaz Meter Pulses Per Round: There are 12 round holes in
Pulses Per Round: 12 the round disk. This is for determining the
measurements.
Cyclic Vol:1214 Cyclic Vol: It is the cyclic needed in order to
move a single round. The measurements are
1.214 mili-liters. Usually this numbers is written in
↑↓ SEL to input 1/1 the Gaz meter outer part

7.4.14.1.7. CALIBRATION PARAMETERS

Infrared signal Remark


Battery
Calibration Params
Altitude: 30 Altitude: This value should be according to the
sea level of the place where the machine is
installed.
Min Flow Rate: 25 Min Flow rate: The minimum flow rate must be
at 25 litres per minute
Min Flow Time: 20 Min Flow Time: This is the time that takes to
fulfil the Min Flow and Min Vol
Min Vol: 20 Min Vol: This is the minimum volume at which
should be delivered according to the conditions
set in Min flow rate and Min flow
↑↓ SEL to input 1/1

7.4.14.1.8. ERROR PARAMETERS


This is only valid for SCG mode. These parameters are set per default accordingly to the TuV test. It is the
Tolerance error that can withstand under Max and Min parameters

Infrared signal Remark


Battery
Error Parameter
Max Error: 115% Max Error: Efficiency error
Min Error: 85 % Min Error: Efficiency error
Number: 10 Number: Number of errors allowed taken by the
Max and Min.
Hours: 72 Hours: Numbers of hours, when after this time
problem is not solved, PUMP / vapour product
will be blocked.
↑↓ SEL to input 1/1

Copyright  2015 Tokheim


TQC Service Manual V12.3 Page 118 of 226
7.4.14.2.CALIBRATION
Infrared signal Remark
Battery
Calibration VR proportional valve calibration

PUMP: 1 Selects either PUMP A or PUMP B


[Motor Warning Time]
0 Range is Min 0 and Max 10 minutes.
Use at least 5 min. Warming Time, this is
important to get accurate calibration.
VR Status menu Shortcut to the Dispenser Info menu where VR
problems can be unblocked.
SEL to input 1/1

Infrared signal Remark


Battery
Calibration Calibration
●Per PUMP Per PUMP
○Per Nozzle Per Nozzle
PUMP: 1
Start PUMP: Selects either A or B
[ PUMP: 1 Start: Start with calibration
2 ]
PR1 NOCAL NOCAL - NOVR: No Vapour recovery
PR2 NOCAL NOCAL - NOCAL: No Calibrated
PR3 NOVR NOVR - CAL: Calibrated
- MOT: VR Motor error
- fVAL: Flow valve error
↑↓ SEL to input 1/2 - uVAL: Return valve error

Infrared signal Remark


Battery
Calibration
[ PUMP: 1
2 ]
PR1 NOCAL NOCAL
PR2 NOCAL NOCAL
PR3 NOVR NOVR
PR4 NOVR NOVR
↑↓ Cal report 2/2

Copyright  2015 Tokheim


TQC Service Manual V12.3 Page 119 of 226
7.4.15. DISPLAY CONFIG
Under this menu multiple display settings can be made for TQC-VGA

Note: If EC is disabled (see 0/p.132) this menu item and following menu items under 4 Configuration will shift up
one line.

7.4.15.1.VGA CONFIGURATION
This sub-menu(s) will only be shown when using VGA screens

Infrared signal Battery Remark


Display Configuration
1 VGA Parameters See 7.4.15.2/p.120
2 Media Servers See 7.4.15.3/p.120
3 Backlight Switch See 7.4.15.4/p.121
4 Backup Config See 7.4.15.5/p.121
5 On Screen Totals See 7.4.15.6/p.121

↑↓ num, press OK1/1

7.4.15.2.VGA PARAMETERS
Infrared signal Battery Remark
VGA Parameters
PUMP: A VGA: Selects one of the VGA’s [A..D]
[ IP address ] IP address of the TQC-VGA
192.168.1.6
[ Subnet mask ] Subnet mask of the TQC-VGA
255.255.240.0
[ Gateway ] Gateway of the TQC-VGA
192.168.240.0
Port nr: 52001 TQC communication port nr
Vmin volume: 2 Value to assemble Vmin picture name,
only input 2,5,10 is valid.
ATC degrees: 15 Value to assemble ATC info picture name,
Only input 15 is valid ( picture VGA )
Audio Volume(%):100 Audio Menu
Test ○ On ● Off Volume in Percentage [0..100]
Audio Volume Test. Start/Stop volume testing.
↑↓ num, press OK2/2

7.4.15.3.MEDIA SERVERS
Infrared signal Remark
Battery
Media Server
[ IP address ] Media server IP address used in TQC-VGA
0.0.0.0
[ Subnet mask ] Media server Subnet mask used in TQC-VGA
255.255.240.0
[ Gateway ] Media server Gateway used in TQC-VGA
192.168.240.0

SEL to input 1/1

Copyright  2015 Tokheim


TQC Service Manual V12.3 Page 120 of 226
7.4.15.4.BACKLIGHT SWITCH
Infrared signal Remark
Battery
Backlight Switching
Pump: A
● Disable Display switching is disabled
(backward compatibility).
○ Via FCC POS controls backlight switching
○ On Manually switch the display ON.
○ Off Manually switch the display OFF (*)
○ Automatic Display switching is fully controlled by the
forecourt controller
[ Automatic ] Display switching power according time
settings in next items
Time On: 06:00 Time that the display will be switched on
Time Off: 23:00 Time that the display will be switched off (*)

SEL to input 1/1

(*) Note: When the backlight setting is ‘Off’ or ‘Automatic’ and the current time is in the backlight-off period, a
customer can still perform a delivery for as long as the POS authorizes this. In this case, the backlight will be put
on for the time of OIML test (following nozzle up) until the idle display is restored (usually 10 seconds after
nozzle is put down).
Note: local preset is not shown on the screen but is handled.

7.4.15.5.BACKUP CONFIG
Infrared signal Remark
Battery
Backup Config

VGA cfg to SD card Save the VGA configuration on SD card


Press OK to start

SEL to input 1/1

7.4.15.6.ON SCREEN TOTALS


Infrared signal Remark
Battery
On Screen Totals
● Disabled No VGA On Screen Totals Possible
○ Per Side On Screen totals per product per side.
○ Per Product On Screen totals per product per dispenser.

SEL to input 1/1

Copyright  2015 Tokheim


TQC Service Manual V12.3 Page 121 of 226
7.4.16. PIN CODE
This menu will only be shown for PIN Only access type.
When using whitelist access type, this menu is not used.

Infrared signal Remark


Battery
Level # PIN Code PIN Code
[Enter New Pin] [Enter New Pin]
***** The PIN Code must be typed here
[Re-Enter New Pin] [Re-Enter New Pin]
***** Confirm the new PIN code

↑↓ SEL to input 1/1

Even if the new PIN is the same as the previous one, “Operation Success” will be shown at the bottom of the
screen.

7.4.17. DELIVERY HANDLING


Infrared signal Remark
Battery
Delivery Handling Delivery Handling
[Finish Transaction] Transaction should be finished when:
[ On Nozzle Down ] YES: All nozzles are stowed
● Yes ○ No NO: All nozzles are stowed OR when error occurs.
[Allow Resume] YES: Go to suspended when preset reached or no flow error
● Yes ○ No NO: Go to idle when preset reached or no flow error.
[Ack Release after] Acknowledge the FCC-“Release” after:
[ Basic Pump tests] YES: Basic pump tests ONLY (e.g. trx-buffer free).
● Yes ○ No NO: ALL pump tests (e.g. trx-buffer free, OIML-test).

↑↓ SEL to input 1/1

Copyright  2015 Tokheim


TQC Service Manual V12.3 Page 122 of 226
7.5. SETUP
When entering the Setup menu, different access rights are handled for the two access types:

Access type
Action PIN Only Whitelist
Enter the first time Request PIN Like any other visit

PIN is valid (when User is User has Setup RW User has Setup RO
entering Setup menu / requested to flip access assigned access assigned
Logging in) cold start switch User is requested to Setup menu is shown
or enter in flip cold start switch or in ReadOnly mode
ReadOnly mode enter in ReadOnly
mode
Enter Setup menu Same access rights as last time apply(seal cannot be flipped
another time (same again)
menu session)

Note: In order to change these parameters, special attention will be required and only an authorized person will
be allowed to access it. A switch sealed inside the dispenser will allow the user to change these parameters
only during cold start or normal operation.

Infrared signal Remark


Battery
Setup
1 Reset See 7.5.1/p.123
2 Software Update See 7.5.2/p.124
3 Restore See 7.5.3/p.125
4 System Setup See 7.5.4/p.126
5 Communication See 0/p.142
6 EMT Setup See 0/p.143
7 Meter Setup See 7.5.7/p.144
8 Product Setup See 7.5.8/p.144
9 System Access See 7.5.9/p.144
↑↓ num, press OK1/1

7.5.1. RESET

When clicking on the Reset. The system will automatically reset and start the system up again.

Infrared signal Remark


Battery
Reset
1 Shutdown Shutdown TQC and TQC-VGA if power is down.*
2 Reset TQC Reset the TQC and TQC-VGA.**
3 Reset TQC-VGA Reset the TQC-VGA only.

↑↓ SEL to input 1/1

Note: This menu is also available in Setup Read-only mode (not necessary to break a seal).
* The TQC-VGA will shut down immediately. Once the main power is turned off, the TQC will shut down
immediately.
** This is a reset from the dispenser (Board ID: TQC Application and Kernel).
For ARM9 higher only the TQC Application will reset to save time.

Copyright  2015 Tokheim


TQC Service Manual V12.3 Page 123 of 226
7.5.2. SOFTWARE UPDATE

Infrared signal Remark


Battery
Software Update Update TQC application Software
[Remote Update]
●Allowed Station owner allows remote software update.
○Not allowed Not allowed to do remote software update.
Software Update Press to activate actual update (see
7.5.2.1/p.124).

↑↓ SEL to input 1/1

7.5.2.1. UPDATE PACKAGE SELECTION


Infrared signal Remark
Battery
Software Update Software Update. Update TQC application
Software
[Current Version]
06.001.12 Current Software version number (x)
[Select Version]
TQC_APP_07.000.00 Found new Software version (y).
Update new Software Press to update from version x to version y

↑↓ SEL to input 1/1

7.5.2.2. SOFTWARE UPDATE PACKAGE HANDLING


The software package used for updating the TQC in the field will be the same package as used in the initial
software loading in the factory. The only difference is that for the factory the package filename does not contain
a version number and for the software update it does contain the version number.

When on the field TQC, the software package is being installed, only the files different from the already installed
version will be taken over. This will be done by comparing the version number inside the current component
against the version number of the component inside the software package. Components available in the update
package and not available in the field TQC will be taken over always.

To determine which Software update package to install below two locations will be investigated and the highest
version number will be presented as selectable:
The SD-Card: Used as portable memory stick. The directory on which to store the Software Update package is
/mnt/sdcard/home/TQC/Transfer.
The Ram memory: Used for network transfer of the SW Update package. The directory on which to store the
Software Update package is /home/TQC/Transfer.

The name of the Software Update package will have no Region indication incorporated. So the
package name will be: TQC_APP_<MM>_<mmm>_<tt>.gz. Where:
MM = Major Version Number
mmm = Minor Version Number
tt = Test Version Number

MID-Reminder: The above mechanism takes care that installing new software will not interfere with running
software since Linux loads/runs the components in memory; the components in the flash-disk are therefore free
for update.

Installing the software update package, HHT menus

Copyright  2015 Tokheim


TQC Service Manual V12.3 Page 124 of 226
7.5.2.3. EXAMPLE OF SOFTWARE UPDATE
TQC runs V09.028.01.
Software update is requested via the HHT.
The TQC detects package versions V11.004.01 and V12.001.01 but only V12.001.01 can be chosen for
software update as it is the highest version and downgrading isn’t supported.

After the software update the TQC application is restarted to activate the new software.

Infrared signal Remark


Battery
Software Update
[ Current Version ] Current version
09.028.01 Version available for update, when no new
[ Select Version ] version is available, system reports “No New
TQC_APPS_12_001_0 Software”
01.gz During update system reports “Installing xx of xx
Please Wait”
When software update is finished, system reports
“Installation Succesful Press a Key to Restart”

↑↓ SEL to input 1/1

Important note: After software update, TQC always need to be restarted when upgrading.

7.5.3. RESTORE

Infrared signal Remark


Battery
Restore
[ Dispenser ID]
xxxxxxx This Dispenser serial number
[ CPU ID ]
xxxxxxx This CPU serial number
[Restore info]
Restore List: x Allows to browse through all SD card backups
found
CPU ID: Shows CPU serial number of the SD card Last
this Known Good backup, hidden for other backup
locations
[External] Location where the backup is found (External for
SD card last Known Good, Internal for internal
flash, Last Known Good and Auto-Backup for SD
card Auto Backup location.
Date: 01-01.2011 TQC Timestamp the backup was created
Time: 14:37
Restore Selection Select which data to restore (check) or keep
(uncheck)
Configuration Restore all data excluding the below
Totals Restore from SD card but keep the current totals
Electronic Restore Electronic Calibration per meter and K
Calibration factor settings
Vapour Recovery Restore Vapour recovery settings & calibration
tables When the backup does not have VR
tables, a notification is shown
Journals Restore journal database (only available in cold-
start)
↑↓ SEL to input 2/2

When (at least) Configuration is to be restored, the TQC will need a reboot after restoring.

Copyright  2015 Tokheim


TQC Service Manual V12.3 Page 125 of 226
NOTE: Before restoring “Configuration only” in Cold-Start, it is mandatory to first change the hydraulic setup to
the value it was when the backup was made.

When Configuration is not to be restored, a reboot is not necessary afterward. The current hydraulic setup has
to match the restored hydraulic setup though. A hydraulic mismatch between current and to be restored
configuration is only allowed with a full restore, in a cold-start session.

In cold-start the auto-configure is skipped. If (CAN) hardware changes have been made to the dispenser after
the backup was made, an auto-configure needs to be performed in the next warm-start session.

The procedure is:


1. Restore complete backup
2. Convert the restored backup to match it with the current software version
3. Apply Restore selection(s)
4. Reboot or activate the restore,
when IP address of TQC is different in backup an additional reboot is required.

The progress of each of these steps is shown on the HHT.

When there is a mismatch in Hydraulic setup string, the menu would show:
Infrared signal Remark
Battery
Restore Data The backup contains a different Hydraulic setup
Hydraulics Mismatch than currently selected. The following reasons
can cause this:
[Pure High Speed] The Pure High Speed nozzle selection differs
from being restored
[VHS NS Combination] The VHS & NS Same or Different product
selection differs from being restored
[Dosing] The Dosing nozzle selection differs from being
restored
[Current] Current Hydraulic setup id
Q510-5N2
[Restored] Hydraulic setup that is being restored
Q48-4N2
Cannot Perform Only Full restore is allowed to activate a different
Partial Restore Hydraulic setup or
1 Accept & Activate Full restore will proceed when choosing this
option
C to Revert Back one menu will return to the Restore
↑↓ Choose 1/2 selection
main menu

7.5.4. SYSTEM SETUP

There are options to choose from: Date/Time Setup, Country Setup, Hydraulic Setup and I/O Configuration.
When a cold start is done more options will be available.

Infrared signal Remark


Battery
System Setup
1 Date/Time Setup See 7.5.4.1/p.127
2 Country Setup See 7.5.4.2/p.127
3 Hydraulic Setup See 0/p.137
4 I/O Configuration See 7.5.4.4/p.141
5 Dispenser ID See 7.5.4.5/p.141
6 Select Language See 7.5.4.6/p.141

↑↓ num, press OK1/1

Copyright  2015 Tokheim


TQC Service Manual V12.3 Page 126 of 226
7.5.4.1. DATE/TIME SETUP
Infrared signal Remark
Battery
Date/Time Setup
It only shows the Date and Time when the setup
was done. These parameters are not
changeable.
Date: 2012.01.03 Date format yyyy.mm.dd
Time: 03:13:57 Time format: hh.mm.ss

↑↓ SEL to input 1/1

Note: In order to change these parameters, special attention will be required and only authorized person will be
allowed to access it. A switch sealed inside the dispenser will allow the user to change these parameters only
during cold start.

7.5.4.2. COUNTRY SETUP


Infrared signal Remark
Battery
Country Setup
1 Rounding Type See 7.5.4.2.1/p.128
2 Display See 7.5.4.2.2/p.129
3 Pulser See 7.5.4.2.3/p.129
4 Unit Setup See 0/p.130
5 Volume Limit See 7.5.4.2.5/p.130
6 Hose Expansion See 7.5.4.2.6/p.130
7 Cents Overshoot See 7.5.4.2.7/p.131
8 Preset Overshoot See 7.5.4.2.8/p.131
9 Leak Detection See 7.5.4.2.9/p.131
10 EC and TC Enable See 0/p.132
11 Optional Function See 0/p.133
12 Lifetime Volume See 7.5.4.2.12/p.134
13 Prod Density See 0/p.135
14 Prod Coefficient See 7.5.4.2.14/p.136

See 0/p.142
15 Volume Scaling (only for protocol UDC).
15 Vol & Amount size See 0/p.143
↑↓ num, press OK2/2 (only for Gilbarco).

Copyright  2015 Tokheim


TQC Service Manual V12.3 Page 127 of 226
Note: Region display & country selection have been migrated to the menu in paragraph 0.
Older TQC versions:

Infrared signal Remark


Battery
Country Setup
[ Region ] Region: Shows the global region. Either
Europe Europe, China, India.
[ Country ] Country: Choose country specific protocol
NETHERLANDS handling (only in cold start)
1 Rounding Type See 7.5.4.2.1/p.128
2 Display See 7.5.4.2.2/p.129
3 Pulser See 7.5.4.2.3/p.129
4 Unit Setup See 0/p.130
5 Volume Limit See 7.5.4.2.5/p.130
6 Hose Expansion See 7.5.4.2.6/p.130
7 Cents Overshoot See 7.5.4.2.7/p.131
8 Preset Overshoot See 7.5.4.2.8/p.131
9 Leak Detection See 7.5.4.2.9/p.131
10 EC and TC Enable See 0/p.132
11 Optional Function See 0/p.133
12 Volume Scaling See 0/p.142
(only for protocol UDC).
13 Lifetime Volume See 7.5.4.2.12/p.134
↑↓ num, press OK2/2

7.5.4.2.1. ROUNDING TYPE

Infrared signal Remark


Battery
Rounding Type Rounding rule for amount values.
●1 Round the least significant digit.
○5 The TQC rounds the last digit to the nearest
value or 0 or 5.
○ 10 The TQC rounds the one but last digit one up
when the last digit is 5 or higher. The last digit will
be set to zero.

↑↓ SEL to input 1/1

Example:
Suppose the real amount is 12.9492. A rounding type of 1 by 1 will result in 12.95, 5 by 5 will result in 12.95 and
10 by 10 in 12.90.

Copyright  2015 Tokheim


TQC Service Manual V12.3 Page 128 of 226
7.5.4.2.2. DISPLAY

Infrared signal Remark


Battery
Display Display setup menu
[ Digits layout] Number of digits for volume, amount and unit
price, select from pre-defined types
○ 664 6 digits total for volume and amount, 4 for unit-
price.
● 775 7 digits total for volume and amount, 5 for unit-
price.
Density Digits: 4 Number of digits for density display. Select from
(density display) None, 4 or 5
FDDP Enabled Check if this dispenser should also use the FDDP
protocol for (VGA) display communication
Comma Amount: 2 Comma Amount: comma position amount.
Comma Volume: 2 Comma Volume: comma position volume.
Comma Unit Price: 3 Comma Volume: comma position unit price.
Comma Density: 0 Comma Density: digits displayed in the density
hidden when density digits = None.
Scaling Unitprice: 0 Scaling Unit Price: This determines if the unit
will be displayed in liters, cent-liter, etc
[Comma Symbol] [Comma Symbol]
○. ● , Allows you to configure the display in format as
Comma or Dot. For example 1.44 or
1,44(comma)
↑↓ SEL to input 1/1

For volume, amount, unit-price and density number of digits, the following table is used to derive the maximum
value for these metrics:

Number of digits Max selectable value


Volume / Amount Unit price / Density
4 9999
5 99999
6 990000 999999
7 9900000 9999999
8 99000000 99999999
9 990000000 999999999

7.5.4.2.3. PULSER

Infrared signal Remark


Battery
Pulser
Normal Speed: 2 Normal Speed is meant to define pulser hide
value for 40 L per minute
High Speed:4 High Speed is meant to define pulser hide value
for 80 L per minute
Max Pulse Err: 3 Max Pulse Err: The user can set the max error
allowed.
Idle Vol.: 20 Idle Vol: 20cl before error “idle volume detected”
can be set between 0-50cl ( advice not to set
below 20cl )
↑↓ SEL to input 1/1

Copyright  2015 Tokheim


TQC Service Manual V12.3 Page 129 of 226
7.5.4.2.4. UNIT SETUP

Infrared signal Remark


Battery
Unit Setup Unit Setup
[Volume Unit] [Volume Unit] There are three possible options
● Liter Liter (Default)
○US Gallon US Gallon
○UK Gallon UK Gallon
[Amount Unit] [Amount Unit] There are two currencies
possibilities
Euro Euro or RMB
[Temp. Unit] [Temp. Unit] There two options
●C Celsius
○F Fahrenheit
↑↓ SEL to input 1/1

7.5.4.2.5. VOLUME LIMIT

Infrared signal Remark


Battery
Volume Limit
PUMP: 1 PUMP: Selects one of the available PUMPs
Prod Product: 1 Prod: Product “x” is a default product name,
Value: 900,00 once the name is defined differently it will appear
that way, e.g. like “Diesel”.
Value: The maximum litters that can be delivered
during a delivery

↑↓ SEL to input 1/1

7.5.4.2.6. HOSE EXPANSION


Hose expansion is a functionality to prevent “non zero display” problems which can be caused during
pressurizing of the system after evaporation of fuel in the line between volume meter and nozzle.

Infrared signal Remark


Battery
Hose Expansion
PUMP: 1 PUMP: Selects one of the available PUMPs
Prod Product: 1 Prod: Product “x” is a default product name,
once the name is defined differently it will appear
that way, i.e like “Diesel”.
Value: 8 Value: Range is Min 0 and Max 20 cl
Time:300 msec Time Range is Min 0 and Max 1999 msec

↑↓ SEL to input 1/1

Copyright  2015 Tokheim


TQC Service Manual V12.3 Page 130 of 226
7.5.4.2.7. CENTS OVERSHOOT
Cents overshoot is a functionality to hide additional pulses when customer wants to end at a round value. I.e.:
due to bended hoses additional pulses can be received after finishing the transaction and customer takes
nozzle out of the car.

Infrared signal Remark


Battery
Cents Overshoot
Digits to Mask :0 Digits to Mask: The digits that could be masked
so that the customer could not see the difference.
Masking Timeout: 0 Masking Timeout: the time that amount is
masked shown to the customer.
Max Mask Pulses: 0 Max Mask Pulse: These are the pulses not
displayed for the customer.

↑↓ SEL to input 1/1

7.5.4.2.8. PRESET OVERSHOOT

Infrared signal Remark


Battery
Preset Overshoot
Max Mask Pulses: 2 Max Mask Pulse: These are the pulses not
Max Check Value: 3 displayed for the customer
Max Check value:

↑↓ SEL to input 1/1

7.5.4.2.9. LEAK DETECTION

Infrared signal Remark


Battery
Leak Detection
[Detection type]
○ Disabled Leak detection functionality is not used
●Prefilling Request Before filling starts do a leak test on request of POS
○ Prefilling Nozzle Before filling starts do a leak test on nozzle taken
○ Postfilling Leak test after the nozzle has been stowed
[Parameters]
Leak Test Time Time that the test needs to complete (in 0,1
seconds)
Leak Test Vol How much leak volume allowed during leak test
Leak Fatal Vol: How much cumulative leak volume allowed for all
tests
Leak counter max How many deliveries’ allowed with leak

↑↓ SEL to input 2/2


In case of an LPG product, a leak test will not be performed

Copyright  2015 Tokheim


TQC Service Manual V12.3 Page 131 of 226
7.5.4.2.10. ELECTRONIC CALIBRATION AND TEMPERATURE
COMPENSATION

Infrared signal Remark


Battery
EC and TC enable Electronic Calibration and Temperature
Compensation
[Pulser]
MPC_A1 Select for which pulser to enable/disable
[Temp. Compensation] Temperature compensation
● Disabled
○ Enabled
[E. Calibration] Electronic Calibration
● Disabled
○ Enabled
Note: these settings can only be changed in cold
start

↑↓ SEL to input 1/1

Infrared signal Remark


Battery
EC and TC enable Electronic Calibration and Temperature
Compensation
[Pulser]
All Pulsers Select “All pulser” to enable/disable at once
[Temp. Compensation] Temperature compensation
○ Disabled
○ Enabled
[E. Calibration] Electronic Calibration
○ Disabled
○ Enabled
Note: these settings can only be changed in cold
start
The status is not shown here; therefore you must
select each pulser separately.

↑↓ SEL to input 1/1

Copyright  2015 Tokheim


TQC Service Manual V12.3 Page 132 of 226
7.5.4.2.11. OPTIONAL FUNCTIONS

7.5.4.2.11.1. KEYLOCK / CALCULATOR DOOR LOCK


It is a legal requirement in some countries, to protect the TQC configuration and database information by a key-
lock because a PIN code only is not sufficient / permitted. Logically this protection is handled via one hardware
input on the TQC. This input can be switched in several ways (e.g. key-switch, detection whether the TQC door
is open, …). The physical location of this IO is on a GPI(O) channel, either on the mainboard or slave IO board.
The IO setup scheme defines this physical location (see separate IO setup specification). Alternatively, a setup
switch on the main board can be used. Which input the TQC should react to (GPIO or setup switch) is chosen in
the menu. Readout of the hardware IO is interpreted that if the input is open, the lock is applied. When the input
is read as closed, the lock is not applied (unlocked). This prevents unlocked access by simply unplugging the
GPIO rather than operating the switch as it is intended.

Reaction on the read-only IO by the menu handling is stated in the table below:

Read-only IO Entering Optional Optional Functions Button setup Browse to other


change or Functions menu menu is current menu change (only menu
state possible in writable
mode)
Read-only Menu is opened If the menu was Menu is refreshed Menu is opened
in read-only writable, it remains and stays in writable in read-only
mode writable, otherwise it mode as it was mode
will be set read-only (*)
Writable Menu is opened in writable mode

(*)
If a change in button setup would mean that the menu becomes read-only, the physical GPIO might as well
be on a SIO board that is not fitted. For this reason, the operator has the chance to revert his button-setup
choice because this menu does not get read-only right-away.
This menu will be part of the Setup / System Setup / Country Setup / Optional Functions menu and can only be
accessed when the setup menu is entered with modify rights (cold start switch had been switched prior to
entering the setup level PIN). This will ensure this setting can only be changed by breaking a seal.

Infrared signal Remark


Battery
Optional Function Optional Function
[Function]
Configure Key-lock Key-lock. This protects access to the TQC via a
hardware input.
● Disabled No protection
○ Enabled Protect (Board ID: TQC becomes read-only)
↑↓ SEL to input 1/1 Note: The keylock is an normally closed input.

If Enabled:

Copyright  2015 Tokheim


TQC Service Manual V12.3 Page 133 of 226
Infrared signal Remark
Battery
Optional Function
[Function]
Configure Key-lock
○ Disabled
● Enabled Enabled == protected
[Physical]
○ GPIO Switch is connected via GPIO (which depends on
button setup) When choosing GPIO, also the
button setup can be chosen. In warmstart, also
an indication of the menu being read-only or
unlocked is stated and changes to the button-
setup will take effect immediately.
● Setup Switch Use the onboard (EIO/CIO) switch
[menu readonly] Indication reflects the actual state of the
associated GPIO
Button setup: 1
↑↓ SEL to input
2/2

7.5.4.2.12. LIFETIME VOLUME


This menu is added to switch on and off the administration of lifetime volume for all pulsers. When enabled, the
lifetime volume can be requested using the F4 function key when not in a menu session and the dispenser is
idle.

Infrared signal Remark


Battery
Optional Functions
[Function]
Meter Throughput Meter Throughput store setting

○ Disabled Whether or not each pulser should store its


● Enabled, details lifetime volume / meter throughput volume.

↑↓ SEL to input 1/1

Details can be entered in the next menu by clicking on ‘Enabled, details’

Infrared signal
Battery
Meter Throughput
● Per Meter
○ Per Product The option “Per Product” needs to be selected in
order to show the Meter Throughput “Per
Nozzle”.

↑↓ SEL to input 1/1

Copyright  2015 Tokheim


TQC Service Manual V12.3 Page 134 of 226
7.5.4.2.13. PROD DENSITY
These are the densities for every fuel. It varies depending on the type of fuel used. The standard densities are
defined in this table. For example 1cubic meter=745 Kg.

This density value is used with Temperature Compensation. There you select per nozzle which fuel type is to be
compensated, using one of the products from this density list or fill in a dedicated value.

Infrared signal
Battery
Prod Density
Unleaded 95: 745
Unleaded 98: 745
Diesel: 833
Gasoil: 850
LPG: 537
Leaded 98: 739

↑↓ SEL to input 1/1

Copyright  2015 Tokheim


TQC Service Manual V12.3 Page 135 of 226
7.5.4.2.14. PROD COEFFICIENT
Prod Coefficient. (Koe) used for the German Temperature compensation algorithm for bio fuels. Fuels are
defined in Fuel types (see 7.4.10.2). All numbers are multiplied by 1000 for better displaying them

Infrared signal
Battery
Prod Coefficient
Bio-/diesel 0,840
Jet-Fuel 0,930
E0-E40 1,270
E60-E100 1,140
Naptha 1,290

↑↓ SEL to input 1/1

7.5.4.1. VOLUME ROUND OFF


Infrared signal Battery Remark
Volume Round off
This function needs to be enabled to round off
● Disabled any volume value exceeding 3 digits after
○ Enabled decimal.
It only works for volume comma position 3, if
another comma position is used this setting
has no effect.*

↑↓ press OK 1/1
*For volume comma position 3, enabling this function will round off the value of 3rd digit from comma position.
This feature can be enabled/disabled in Coldstart as well as warmstart. The default setting is DISABLED.

7.5.4.2. VOLUME CALCULATE


Infrared signal Battery Remark

This function needs to be enabled for


● Disabled calculating the volume back,
○ Enabled this is done using the amount and unit price.
It only works for volume comma position 3, if
another comma position is used this setting
has no effect.*

↑↓ press OK 1/1
*For volume comma position 3, enabling this function will round off the value of 3rd digit from comma position.
This feature can be enabled/disabled in Coldstart as well as warmstart. The default setting is DISABLED.

Copyright  2015 Tokheim


TQC Service Manual V12.3 Page 136 of 226
7.5.4.3. HYDRAULIC SETUP
This selection is needed only when a cold-start with “TQC defaults” must be done. When a cold-start with”
factory defaults” is performed, the correct hydraulic configuration is already available.

Infrared signal Remark


Battery
Hydraulic Setup Hydraulic Setup
[ Setup ID ] Setup-ID:
Q510-5N2
HYM Setup See 0/p.138
Pump Setup See 7.5.4.3.3/p.138
VHS Setup See 7.5.4.3.4/p.139
Valve Type See 7.5.4.3.5/p.139
Product Selection See 7.5.4.3.6/p.139
Ratio Setup See 0/p.140

↑↓ press OK 1/1

After the hydraulic setup has changed, automatically the HYM Setup menu is shown (see 138/p.137).
If the hydraulic setup is invalid one of the messages from 0/p.137.

7.5.4.3.1. HYDRAULIC SETUP ACTIVATION RESULT


The activation result of the entered ID is displayed in the status bar. It can be either:
Status indication Remark, supported since (Introduced in version)
Illegal Format String does not start with ‘Q’, The ‘-‘ sign after the stacks and hoses is
missing, Stacks are not properly separated (using ‘.’sign), A stack type
is not recognized, number of stacks and hoses before ‘-‘ does not
match what’s behind. Check & re-enter the setup.
HHT Data Error Insufficient number of parameters specified by HHT. Try again or call
SSD / level 3 for support.
Insufficient HYMs The Hydraulic setup entered requires more HYM modules than can be
fitted on the current IO board hardware. Check & re-enter hydraulic
setup.
Explicit Product (Very- / Ultra-) High Speed stacks cannot be specified with stack
ass multipliers. Each such stack must be identified individually using unique
product assignments as well.
Too many products The number of products exceeds the (IFSF defined) max of 8.
This can include 3 products per dosing hose and 2 products when a
VNx configuration is used with different product assigned to NS than
for VHS. Check the hydraulic setup for validity & re-enter it.
Access File Error File IO error. Reboot TQC and try again. If this error persists, call SSD /
level 3 support.
Invalid Parameter Illegal side indicator specified or the hydraulics do not add up to any
stack, hose, product, FIP or meters (V12)
Operation Failure An error other than the above occurred, call SSD / level 3 (V12)
Older versions: any of the above problems could have happened.
Check the hydraulic setup & re-enter it.

Copyright  2015 Tokheim


TQC Service Manual V12.3 Page 137 of 226
7.5.4.3.2. HYM SETUP

Infrared signal Remark


Battery
Hydraulic Setup HYM Hydraulic Setup
[Pure High Speed] The menu shows an overview of all HYM
[ A B:HYM Assignment] configurations and per HYM side a setting
1□ □:NS/HS(AB) denoting if the nozzles are to be interpreted as
‘pure highspeed’ type, meaning that nozzle’s flow
2□ □:NS/HS(AB)
is always 80 l/min high-speed. This pure
3□ □:NS/HS(AB) highspeed setting will only be applied on nozzles
4□ □:NS/HS(AB) of type NS/HS (normal).
5□ □:Empty

↑↓ SEL to input 1/1

7.5.4.3.3. PUMPS SETUP

Infrared signal Remark


Battery
Pump Setup
1 Pump 1 See 7.5.4.3.3.1/p.138
2 Pump 2

↑↓ SEL to input 1/1

same display type on all PUMPs.

7.5.4.3.3.1. PUMP SETUP

Infrared signal Remark


Battery
Pump 1 Setup Pump Setup

Num of Products: 5 Number of products on this pump (read-only)


Num of Displays: 1 Set number of displays (2 for Satellite / Twin)
Only selection “1” is supported for FIP C and D,
therefore this setting is hidden in these cases.
[Master display] Select display type for master display
○ LCD Only selection LCD or VGA is possible. Number
● VGA of digits per line is migrated to 0.
Unit price Num: 1 Number of unit-price displays on master display,
1 or ‘Num of Prods’. When ‘Num of Prods’ is
more than 4 and display type LCD is chosen,
only selection 1 is possible.
● Left to Right Unit price display direction (only shown when
○ Right to Left Num >1 and non-VGA display types)
[Slave LCD display] Select slave LCD display settings (VGA display
type is not supported for slave)
Slave menu part is hidden for FIP C or D
Unit price Num: 1 Number of unit-price displays on slave display, 1
or ‘Num of Prods’. When ‘Num of Prods’ is more
than 4 and display type LCD is chosen, only
selection 1 is possible.
● Left to Right Unit price display direction (only shown when
○ Right to Left Num >1 and non-VGA display types)
↑↓ SEL to input 1/2

Copyright  2015 Tokheim


TQC Service Manual V12.3 Page 138 of 226
7.5.4.3.4. VHS SETUP

Infrared signal Remark


Battery
VHS Setup VHS Setup
[Max Flow Check]
30 * sec
[SHS 0 Flow Check]
60 * sec
[Meter No Run Check]
50 L/min
[NS Combination] Select if the same or separate products should
● Same Product be handled for the VHS and Normal Speed
○ Different Product nozzles when combining these nozzles on one
stack.
This can be changed in coldstart only.
Note: Changing the NS Combination setting is only allowed in Coldstart and results in regenerating the
Hydraulic setup. See 0/p.137 for possible status indication.

7.5.4.3.5. VALVE TYPE

Infrared Remark
signal Battery
Valve Type HYM Hydraulic Valve Setup
[Proportional Valve] The menu shows an overview of all HYM
[ A B:HYM Assignment] configurations and per HYM side a setting
1□ □:NS/HS(AB) denoting if the valves connected are proportional
2□ □:NS/HS(AB) (checked) or open/close binary control
(unchecked).
3□ □:VHS+Sat(A)
Note: the proportional setting is not allowed for
4□ □:LPG(AB) LPG or AdBlue products.
5□ □:Empty

SEL to input 1/1

7.5.4.3.6. PRODUCT SELECTION


Infrared signal Remark
Battery
Product Selection
1 Dosing See 0/p.140

SEL to input 1/1

Copyright  2015 Tokheim


TQC Service Manual V12.3 Page 139 of 226
7.5.4.3.6.1. DOSING PRODUCT SELECTION

Infrared signal Remark


Battery
Nozzle Setup
[Additive selection]
[A B:HYM Assignment] Select which nozzles are using dosing. This is
■ ■: NS/HS(AB) selectable per Pump.
□ □: NS/HS(AB)
: LPG (AB) Note The selection is only available for NS / HS
□ □: NS/HS(AB) nozzles. For other nozzle types, the selection is
not available.
SEL to input 1/1
Note: Changing the Additive nozzle setting is only allowed in Coldstart and results in regenerating the Hydraulic
setup. See 0/p.137 for possible status indication.

7.5.4.3.7. RATIO SETUP


Infrared signal Remark
Battery
Ratio Setup
1 Dosing See 7.5.4.3.7.1/p.140

SEL to input 1/1


7.5.4.3.7.1. DOSING RATIO SETUP

Infrared signal Remark


Battery
Dosing
[Base product]
product name It is possible to select the product from the base product
[product name additive only. According the selected product, the appropriate
1] product name for the additives is shown for “product
260 ul per liter name additive 1/2”.
[product name additive The values for the dosing ratio can be adjusted in steps
2] of 10. The minimum is 100 and the maximum is 500.
430 ul per liter The same additive value is used for all sides and cannot
be setup differently per side. It is possible to select
different additive values for different base products.
This example shows the default ppm values.

Page 1/2

In case no nozzles are set up for using dosing, the following is shown for in menu:
Infrared signal Remark
Battery
Dosing
[No Dosing Setup] In case no nozzles are configured for using dosing, the
product name is blank resulting in this screen.

Page 1/1

Copyright  2015 Tokheim


TQC Service Manual V12.3 Page 140 of 226
7.5.4.4. I/O CONFIGURATION
Infrared signal Remark
Battery
IO Configuration
[ Nozzle Contacts ] This setting is only for normal fuel nozzle
contacts. For LPG nozzles the setting is done in
the LPG menu (See 7.4.4.3/p.88)
●Close ○Open Normally Closed or Normally Open
Button Setup: 1 Basic configuration for your input/output
definitions. This defines the function for each
input/output.
( see TQC GPIO setup drawing 943757 for
details)
↑↓ SEL to input 1/1

NOTE: changing a button setup will need a restart of TQC since the IO needs to be reconfigured in case the
button setup is changed.

7.5.4.5. DISPENSER ID
Infrared signal Remark
Battery
Dispenser ID

SN: 123456789012* Can be changed in Setup RW access level


(warmstart)

↑↓ SEL to input 1/1

(*) This number is set in the factory. The number should match the dispenser serial number stated on the metal
type plate / sticker.

7.5.4.6. SELECT LANGUAGE


Infrared signal Remark
Battery
Select Language

●English Select the language from the menu files.


○Brazilian
○Deutsch When changing the language, the menu will
○Espanol remain in the current language for this menu
○Francais session. When entering the menu for the next
○Italiano time, the new language settings will be applied.

↑↓ SEL to input 1/1

Copyright  2015 Tokheim


TQC Service Manual V12.3 Page 141 of 226
7.5.5. COMMUNICATION

Infrared signal Remark


Battery
Communication Forecourt communication
[FCC Protocol] Protocol to be used to communicate with a site
IFSF controller. Selecting the correct protocol will show
dedicated protocol menu options and hide not
applicable options.
[Region] Global region of operation. Either:
Europe Europe, India or China (display only).
[Country] Country of operation. Protocol specific handling
NETHERLANDS can be derived from this setting.
↑↓ SEL to input 1/1 Choose a country from a list in cold start.

Selecting a different protocol can result in the following error conditions:


Open Jumper on COM: The jumper on the COM board needs to be removed
Close Jumper on COM: A jumper must be placed on the COM board
Swap Jumper on COM: The jumper on the COM board needs to swap position
(e.g. pin 1&2 instead of pin 2&3)
Unsupported COM: The fitted COM board does not support the protocol selected.

In warm-start it is also possible that different software needs to be software-updated. In that case, an Auto-
configure is performed when leaving this menu, see also paragraph 7.4.5.1.1/p.93.

Infrared signal Battery Remark


Communication
[FCC Protocol]
IFSF
[Region]
Europe
[Country]
NETHERLANDS
[CO to SA mode] Connected to Standalone mode:
○ No No: CO to SA change is not allowed at all.
○ Yes Yes: CO to SA change is always allowed.
● Disconnected Disconnected: CO to SA change is only
possible when disconnected.
↑↓ SEL to input 1/1 The default mode is ”Disconnected”.

7.5.5.1.1. VOLUME SCALING


This menu is added to communicate volumes in a different scaling format using the UDC forecourt protocol.

Infrared signal Battery Remark


Unit Scaling
[Delivery Volume] To apply scaling to the FCC via the UDC protocol
Multiplier 1 Multiplier 1
[Delivery Amount] Multiplier 10
Multiplier 100 Multiplier 100
[Totals Volume]
Multiplier 10
[Totals Amount]
Multiplier 1
↑↓ SEL to input 1/1

Copyright  2015 Tokheim


TQC Service Manual V12.3 Page 142 of 226
7.5.5.1.2. VOLUME & AMOUNT SIZE
This menu is added to communicate volume and amount in a different format using the Gilbarco forecourt
protocol.

Infrared signal Battery Remark


Volume & Amount Size
[Money Size] Different setting possible depending on
connected
○ 5 Digits POS
● 6 Digits
[Volume size]
○ Internal Adjust
● 3 decimals

↑↓ SEL to input 1/1

7.5.6. EMT SETUP

Infrared signal Remark


Battery
EMT Setup EMT Setup
● Disabled Here it is possible to enable the possibility to
○ Enabled activate the counters displayed on the dispenser

↑↓ SEL to input 1/1

When EMT enabled:

Infrared signal Remark


Battery
EMT Setup EMT Setup
○ Disabled
● Enabled
[ Assignment per]
○ Prod EMT per product
● Meter EMT per meter
[ Resolution]
●1
○ 0,1
○ 0,01
↑↓ SEL to input 1/1

Copyright  2015 Tokheim


TQC Service Manual V12.3 Page 143 of 226
7.5.7. METER SETUP

Infrared signal Remark


Battery
Meter Setup Meter Setup
Meter: 1 Shows the selected meter
[Meter Type] This is the identification of the meter.
TQM TQM
Max Flow Rate: 80 Max Flow rate: The maximum flow rate in the
meter selected
Pulse Weight: 1 Pulse Weight: This is the volume of the type of
meter selected, for example 5cl or 8cl per pulse
EC Factor: 1,0000 EC Factor: Electronic compensation factor

↑↓ num, press OK1/1

7.5.8. PRODUCT SETUP

Infrared signal Remark


Battery
Prod Setup Product Setup
[Product] Product : selects 1 to 8, depending on
Product 1 configuration.
[FuelType] FuelType : It shows the name of the product
Unleaded 95 chosen

Density: It shows the product’s density


Density: 745
Alpha: 0,001213 Alpha: It shows the product’s Alpha
Koe: In case of bio fuel

↑↓ SEL to input 1/1

7.5.9. SYSTEM ACCESS

Infrared signal Remark


Battery
System Access System Access
1 Level 5 PIN Code* See 7.5.9.1/p.145
2 Level W PIN Code
3 Revert Default PIN* See 7.5.9.3/p.145
4 Setup Device* See 7.5.9.4/p146
5 Whitelist Update* See 7.5.9.5/p.146

*PIN can only be changed when PIN code acces


is the authenticatation method, Whitelist update
is only available if whitelist is the authenticatation
method.

↑↓ num, press OK 1/1

Copyright  2015 Tokheim


TQC Service Manual V12.3 Page 144 of 226
7.5.9.1. LEVEL W PIN CODE
Infrared signal Battery Remark
Level W PIN Code Level W PIN Code
[ Enter New PIN] [Enter New Pin]
***** The PIN Code must be typed here
[ Re-Enter New PIN] [Re-Enter New Pin]R
***** Confirm the new PIN code

↑↓ SEL to input 1/1

Even if changed PIN is same as previous one, “Operation Success” will be shown at the bottom of the screen.
For PIN change errors see 7.2.5.3/p.62.

7.5.9.2. LEVEL 5 PIN CODE


This menu will only be shown for “PIN Only” access type

Infrared signal Battery Remark


Level 5 PIN Code Level 5 PIN Code
[ Enter New PIN] [Enter New Pin]
***** The PIN Code must be typed here
[ Re-Enter New PIN] [Re-Enter New Pin]
***** Confirm the new PIN code

↑↓ SEL to input
1/1

Even if changed PIN is same as previous one, “Operation Success” will be shown at the bottom of the screen.
For PIN change errors see 7.2.5.3/p.62.

7.5.9.3. RESUME DEF CODE


This menu will only be shown for “PIN Only” access type. This setup menu defines PIN codes per menu level
and allows resetting the PIN codes to their default values ("restore factory settings").

Infrared signal
Battery
Revert Default PIN
□ Operation
□ Management
□ Maintenance
□ Configuration

↑↓ SEL to input 1/1

Copyright  2015 Tokheim


TQC Service Manual V12.3 Page 145 of 226
7.5.9.4. SETUP DEVICE
There are two ways of setting the dispenser. In Europe the default is the Hand Held terminal(HHT), keypad is
not implemented

Infrared signal
Battery
Setup Device
●HHT
○ Keypad

↑↓ SEL to input 1/1

7.5.9.5. WHITELIST UPDATE

This menu is only shown when using the “Whitelist” access type.

Infrared signal Remark


Battery
Whitelist Update
[Update from]
○ RAM Expects the file /home/TQC/Transfer/WhiteList.xml
to be present (use FTP to get the file there).
● SD Card An SD card is inserted and has a directory
structure
/mnt/sdcard/home/TQC/Transfer/xxx/WhiteList.xml
Texaco Offers a selection of all Whitelists found on the
SD card
Update Starts the update process. The will also end the
menu session.

Press Key 1/1

After the update is successful, the following screen is automatically shown:

Infrared signal
Battery
Whitelist Update

Update Successful
Press C to exit

Press Key 1/1

Copyright  2015 Tokheim


TQC Service Manual V12.3 Page 146 of 226
7.6. WEIGHT & MEASURES
This menu shows some legally relevant settings in read-only style.

Infrared signal Remark


Battery
W&M Main Menu W&M Main menu
1 Totals Query totals per product and / or pump (See 7.6.1/p.147)
2 Transactions Query transactions per Pump (See 7.6.2/p.148)
3 Integrity Info Show integrity information (Query journal database (See
7.6.3/p.149)
4 Delivery Mode Show delivery mode per Pump (See 7.6.4/p.150)
5 Application build Show software versions (See 7.6.5/p.150)
6 Product Coef. Coefficients and densities used for temperature
compensation (See 7.6.6/p.150)
7 TC Products Shows which meters / products enable Temperature
Compensation and which fuel-type is assigned (See
7.6.7/p.150)
8 EC Products Shows which meters / products enable Electronic
Calibration and which K-factor is assigned (See
7.6.8/p.151)
9 Test Delivery Perform a test delivery (See 7.6.9/p.151)

↑↓ C to Return 1/1

7.6.1. W &M TOTALS


Infrared signal Remark
Battery
W&M Totals Query the total database
[Totals Per] Selects one of the available Pumps or the entire
dispenser:
Dispenser Dispenser / Pump 1, 2, …
[Product] Product “x” is a default product name, once the name
Product 1 is defined differently it will appear that way, i.e like
“Diesel”.
Shows all ‘Grand’ totals (Connected and Stand-alone
combined), (See 7.6.1.1/p.148)

↑↓ SEL to input 1/1

Copyright  2015 Tokheim


TQC Service Manual V12.3 Page 147 of 226
7.6.1.1. W & M PUMP GRAND TOTALS
Infrared signal Remark
Battery
W & M Grand Totals Grand Total for the selected pump / product
[Dispenser] From V10 onward this shows the selection that has been made,
[Product 1] Dispenser / Pump 1,2,… and Product x
Meter : 1 Which meter was used for delivery
Amount: 14,67 Total amount: The total amount delivered on this dispenser.
Volume: 13,20 Volume: Total volume delivered on this dispenser The volume
unit, is either Liter or US Gallon
TC Vol.: 0,00 TC Vol: Temperature Compensated Volume is to correct the (EC
corrected) Raw volume against normalized 15 degrees thermal
expansion
EC Vol.:0,00 EC Vol: Electronic (meter) Calibration to correct measurement
failures of the meter, will be applied first to correct the Raw
Volume
Num of Deliveries Total number of deliveries for this pump
0034
↑↓ Page 1/1

7.6.2. W & M READ TRANSACTION


Infrared signal Remark
Battery
W & M Transaction
□ Pump x Pump: Identifies of which FIP the transactions must be
shown
Show Results Show all transactions of the selected pump, newest
first (See 7.6.2.1/p.199)

↑↓ SEL to input 1/1

7.6.2.1. W & M TRANSACTION DETAILS


Infrared signal Remark
Battery
W & M Transaction
15 records num: 1 15 is the total number of transactions.
1 is the specific record number
SN:0044 SN: Transaction number
Date 2009-01-02 Date: Shows the date of the transaction
Time Start:22:33:07 Time Start: The time it started the transaction
Time Stop:22:33:19 Time Stop: The time it stopped the transaction
Nozzle ID:1 Nozzle ID: Shows the Nozzle ID number
Error Code:0 Error Code: Error number, if any otherwise 0
D. Mode: Standalone Delivery Mode: It shows either Standalone or
connected. In this example: standalone.
↑↓ Page 1/3

Copyright  2015 Tokheim


TQC Service Manual V12.3 Page 148 of 226
Infrared signal Remark
Battery
W & M Transaction
15 records num: 1 Current record
Amount: 14,67 Amount: The price to pay in the selected currency
Unit Price: 1,111 Unit Price: Shows the price per volume unit
Volume: 13,20 Volume: Shows the price per selected volume unit,
i.e Liter,US Gallon
M1 Vol: 13,20 M1 Vol: Meter1 Volume
M2 Vol: 0,00 M2 Vol: Meter 2 Volume
Raw Vol: 13,20 Raw Vol: The measured volume without
Temperature compensation and Electronic
calibration.
↑↓ Page 2/3

Infrared signal Remark


Battery
W & M Transaction
15 records num: 1 Current record
Ave Temp.: 15,00 Ave Temp: The average Temperature during this
transaction
TC Vol.: 0,00 TC Vol: Temperature Compensated Volume is to
correct the (EC corrected) Raw volume against
normalized 15 degrees thermal expansion
EC Vol.:0,00 EC Vol: Electronic (meter) Calibration to correct
measurement failures of the meter, will be applied first
to correct the Raw Volume
Max Flow: 48,04 Max Flow: Shows the maximum flow rate during this
transaction
Ave Flow: 48,02 Ave Flow: Shows the average flow rate during this
transaction
↑↓ Page 3/3

7.6.3. W & M INTEGRITY INFORMATION


Infrared signal Remark
Battery
W & M Integrity Info
X Records: 1 Record 1 of X
[Module] Which software module has been changed
IOHandler.Arm
Version: 09.000.96 Software version of the module
CRC:00004B68 Checksum of the module
Date:YYYY-MM-DD Compile date & time of the module
Time:hh:mm:ss
↑↓ SEL to input 1/1

Copyright  2015 Tokheim


TQC Service Manual V12.3 Page 149 of 226
7.6.4. W & M DELIVERY MODE
Infrared signal Remark
Battery
W & M Delivery Mode Delivery Mode:
[ Pump 1 2 3 4] Only the available Pumps can be toggled between
Connected □ □ □ □ connected mode and standalone.

Connected mode: (checked) Dispenser is controlled


via POS
Standalone: (unchecked) dispenser is in standalone
mode, not controlled via POS.

Note: The Pump configuration 1,2,3,4 (4-active


hose)
↑↓ SEL to input 1/1

7.6.5. W & M SOFTWARE INFORMATION


Infrared signal Remark
Battery
Software Info Software information menu
TQC: 09.000.01 TQC Software version number
2013/09/30 15:34:10 Date & time the software is generated
MID: 09.001.00 MID software version number (legally relevant components)
2013/09/21 13:56:10 Data and time the MID software was generated
[Last Error] Indication of the last error (per FIP)
Pump1: 61-100 Error code information in format module – error code
Pulser Error Textual error meaning / extra information
Pump 2: 51-165 The pump number corresponds to the number on the pump, per
side.
Integrity Error

C to go back 1/1

7.6.6. W & M PRODUCT COEFFICIENTS AND DENSITIES


Infrared signal Remark
Battery
W & M Prod Density Product Koe factor and Density menu (Temperature
Compensation functionality)
[Koe factor] Used for Bio fuel temperature compensation algorithms, factors
are shown x1000 for better displaying them.
Bio-/diesel 0,840
Jet-Fuel 0,930
E0-E40 1,270
E60-E100 1,140
Naptha 1,290
[Density] Used for non-bio and LPG temperature compensation algorithms
Unleaded 95: 00745
Diesel: 00833

C to go back 1/1

Copyright  2015 Tokheim


TQC Service Manual V12.3 Page 150 of 226
7.6.7. W & M FUEL TYPES
Infrared signal Remark
Battery
W & M Fuel Types Fuel types used for temperature compensation algorithms
[Meter – Fuel Type]
1 – Unleaded 95 This meter has fuel-type Unleaded 95 assigned.
2 – (TC Not Enabled) Temperature Compensation algorithms are disabled for this
meter
3- Bio-/diesel
4-Gasoil

C to go back 1/1

7.6.8. W & M EC FACTORS


Infrared signal Remark
Battery
W & M EC Factors Which correction factor is used per meter for Electronic
Calibration
[Meter – K Factor]
1 – 1,0002 This meter has a positive drift of 0,02%
2 – (EC Not Enabled) Electronic Calibration is not applied for this meter (as having K
factor 1,0000).
3- 0,9997
4-0,9998

C to go back 1/1

7.6.9. W&M TEST DELIVERY


Test delivery will be performed in Connected mode (using POS). POS Therefore needs to authorize the delivery.

Note: Depending on what menu settings have been changed prior to choosing the Test Delivery, initialization
can take some time and a progress screen will be shown during initialization.

Infrared signal Remark


Battery
W & M Test Delivery Test Delivery
Pump: 1 Which pump to initiate test deliveries for (other pumps are blocked)
[ Preset] Setup of the test delivery
●Time 00:05:00 Time: Set the time to be tested
○Amount 1000,00 Or Amount: Set the amount to be tested
○Volume 1000,00 Or Volume: Set the volume to be tested
[ Pulse Hide ] Pulse hide : Enable or disable
●Disabled ○Enabled

↑↓ SEL to input 1/1

Copyright  2015 Tokheim


TQC Service Manual V12.3 Page 151 of 226
7.6.9.1. W&M TEST DELIVERY CSD SETUP
Infrared signal Remark
Battery
W & M Test Delivery
Pump : 3 Pump number selected to perform the delivery on
[Display Line Setup] What delivery metric to show on which line of the CSD (this can
be different from what is displayed for real deliveries).
Top: Net Volume Net Volume including EC and TC compensation (fast update
rate)
Bottom: Mtr. Temperature Current temperature (per meter)
UP: TC Volume Temperature compensated volume. Note: this is the absolute
delta-volume compared to the raw volume.

[Pick Nozzle] Lifting a nozzle will start the already setup test delivery on the
selected pump with the currently setup display metrics.
↑↓ SEL to input 1/1

Copyright  2015 Tokheim


TQC Service Manual V12.3 Page 152 of 226
7.7. COLD-START
Cold-start means that the system will start with a (Board ID: TQC) default configuration and all prior
configuration & history is removed. It is typically used when the dispenser is built in factory and powered for the
first time and can also be used in the field to resolve problems that have no other means of solving. It also
allows settings to be set that cannot be changed in warm-start.
To start the TQC in cold-start, flip the cold-start switch (break the seal) and (re-)start the TQC. It will
automatically show the cold-start pin entry menu:

Infrared signal Remark


Battery
Cold Start The PIN is numerical and exactly 6 digits. When
the user inputs his code, the system shows
‘*” for safety reasons.

PIN Code: ******

Input PIN 1/1


After entering the PIN, the next handling depends on is factory defaults are to be activated or TQC defaults.

7.7.1. CALCULATOR DEFAULTS: MANDATORY PARAMETERS


Before the actual cold start setup is initiated, a menu is shown with important parameters to be set first

Infrared signal Remark


Battery
Mandatory Parameters
1 Coldstart Setup see next page

[Dispenser ID] Dispenser serial number, see the dispenser type-


plate
SN: ______________ See 7.5.4.5/p.141
[Volume Unit] Volume unit the TQC should use.
● Liter See 0/p.130
○US Gallon
○UK Gallon
↑↓ num, press OK1/1

Infrared signal Remark


Battery
Mandatory Parameters
1 Coldstart Setup It is compulsory to enter Dispenser ID before
starting
ColdStart process. If user tries to enter
“ColdStart
[Dispenser ID] Setup” menu without entering dispenser ID, an
error message will be displayed at the bottom
line.
SN: ______________
[Volume Unit]
● Liter
○US Gallon
○UK Gallon
Enter ID

Copyright  2015 Tokheim


TQC Service Manual V12.3 Page 153 of 226
7.7.2. TQC COLD START MAIN MENU
The Cold start main menu offers most options the Setup menu also does. Excluded here is the reset and
software update functionality.

Infrared signal Remark


Battery
Coldstart
1 Restore See 7.5.3/p.125
2 System Setup See 7.5.4/p.126
3 Communication See 0/p.142
4 EMT Setup See 0/p.143
5 Meter Setup See 7.5.7/p.144
6 Product Setup See 7.5.8/p.144
7 System Access See 7.5.9/p.144
8 Quit See 7.8.1/p.155
↑↓ num, press OK1/1

7.7.3. FACTORY COLD START MENU


The Factory cold start procedure is largely automated as the input configuration is dedicated to the current
dispenser and only needs some internal TQC parsing to finalize it. The progress of this is shown in the next
menu.

Infrared signal
Battery
Factory Defaults

[Selected Country]
The Netherlands
[Activating Hydraulic]
Q48-4N2
Auto Configure

Standby… 1/1

Once these actions finalize, the configuration automatically quits the menu, see 7.8.1/p.155.

Copyright  2015 Tokheim


TQC Service Manual V12.3 Page 154 of 226
7.8. QUIT
Quit exits the main menu application on the Hand Held Terminal.
Before the Configuration can be quitted, the user needs to switch off all cold-start switches (both TQC and
factory cold start switches). When Electronic Calibration is enabled for at least one meter, also all seal switches
of all HYMs need to be in the ‘seal’ position (pointing down).
Different actions follow in warm- and cold-start:

7.8.1. COLD START QUIT


Before actually quitting, the configuration is parsed & committed to the rest of the system and an auto-configure
of all CAN devices is initiated. This auto-configure does not perform software update & integrity checking, what
is done in warm-start Auto-Configure. see also paragraph 7.4.5.1.1/93.

The relevant ‘switches off’ check (paragraph 7.8/p.155) is performed after the auto-configure.

7.8.2. WARM START QUIT


When changes have been made to either Configuration or Setup menu settings, the IO configuration will be
rebuilt first to incorporate these setting changes. Also the service technician is asked to make a Last Known
Good backup to incorporate the changes in an updated backup.
Note: This menu is skipped when the no action timer expired. The no-action timer also applies to this menu.

Infrared signal Remark


Battery
Exit Configuration
1 Backup Config Update the last known good configuration
2 Quit Now Actually quit the menus immediately

C to return 1/1

When quitting the menu. In the LCD or VGA display there will be a message saying that the system is getting
back to operational mode.

Infrared signal Remark


Battery
Quitting Setup

Parse Setup

Finished Config

Standby… 1/1

It takes about 5-7 sec. When the switch Setup in the TQC hardware is enabled (Facing upwards). Then a
message should be displayed in this screen to disable it and then it will get to operational status.
When an auto-configure was performed where at least one device failed to software update, the TQC
Application will reboot to resolve the CAN software update problem.

Copyright  2015 Tokheim


TQC Service Manual V12.3 Page 155 of 226
Infrared signal Remark
Battery
OK: Configuration / Login Configuration (PIN Only) or Login (Whitelist)
F1: When the option Quit was chosen. Then this
F2: window popped up. This is the first screen
F3: shown when the device is turned on
F4:
F5:
F6:
F7:
F8:
Press Key 1/1

7.8.3. RESOLVE IO RE-CONFIGURE PROBLEMS


Re-configure of IO is performed automatically when IO relevant settings have been changed in the menus. This
however could result into problems. A special menu is introduced, allowing the user to resolve these problems.

Infrared signal Remark


Battery
IO Re-configure Show the (problematic) end result of IO re-
[Problem Occurred] configuration to the user and allow for corrective
actions
<textual problem info>
Code: <numerical error Problem that occurred, see below
id>
[Recommended Action] List of actions that can be performed to resolve the
problem. By default only 1 or 2 actions are shown
that are likely to help solve the problem.
Activate Defaults Re-activates the default IO & Hydraulic schemes
from the Calculator defaults backup
Reset TQC Reset the TQC and calculator (reboot), see 7.5.1/p.
123.
Regen. Hydraulic Regenerate the current hydraulic setup to undo any
external (FCC) manipulation to this.
Show all Actions Show all available actions that make is possible to
resolve the problem (see above)
Re-configure IO Re-configure IO again, will return to this menu
afterward to show the result, also when successful.
CAN Auto-configure Start CAN Auto-configuration, see 7.4.5.1.1/p.93
[Login Setup RW for] Corrective actions that require to login with Setup
RW (break seal) access rights (Only shown when
the current login has lower rights).
Software Update Perform a software update to straighten
inconsistencies out between default IO schemes
and various software components.
C to go Back 1/1 Return to main menu

Note: This menu requires that you are logged in with Configuration RW access rights or higher.

Copyright  2015 Tokheim


TQC Service Manual V12.3 Page 156 of 226
List of possible error codes & texts:
Code Text Description
150 Old IO Version The IO configuration file (layout) is outdated, IOHandler
requires re-configuration
151 Old IO Libraries The Software library / libraries is / are out of date
(incorrect version(s))
152 Missing IO content The IO Configuration misses (critical) content
153 Reserved IO used The IO configuration defines IO at reserved (physical)
locations
154 Out of IO memory Out of memory when re-generating the IO configuration
or reading it
155 Hydraulic IO fail Hydraulic setup is not unique, Some / All hydraulic
components cannot be controlled / addressed
156 Meter ass. fail Problem parsing meter assignments for a HYM,
Hydraulic setup seems incorrect
157 Product ass. fail Problem parsing product assignments for a HYM,
Hydraulic setup seems incorrect
159 Unknown Platform Hardware platform (e.g. EIO or Single-Twin) is not
recognized (by this version of software)
160 Read Settings Failed Failed to read Setup items that are relevant for
generating the IO & Hydraulic setup
161 HYM Name unknown A HYM name that is assigned in could not be found in
the list of HYM definitions, cannot assign hydraulics
162 Database read failed Failed to read relevant info from database (relevant for
loading / generating the configuration)
163 Database store fail Failed to store relevant info to database (nozzle
database items, IO configuration file)
164 / 158 IO Setup fail Failed to activate the correct IO / Button setup scheme
165 Def. IO Setup fail Failed to activate the default IO controls (like battery
test, mains detect, etc)
166 Device setup fail Failed to generate or send (CAN) device setup
167 IO Cfg Create Failed Failed to create the IO configuration file (general error)
XXX Reconfig IO err XXX (Unhandled, future supported) error. see error list

Copyright  2015 Tokheim


TQC Service Manual V12.3 Page 157 of 226
8. PROTOCOLS
8.1. DART
For DART the DART board (Board ID: TQC022) has to be used.

8.1.1. COMMUNICATION TRANSMISSION SPECIFICATIONS


Baudrate 9600 (default) or 19200
start bits: 1
data bits 8
parity bit: odd
stop bit: 1

8.1.2. TQC SETTINGS


Setup/Communication (see 0/p.142)
[FCC Protocol]
DART
Region
[EUROPE]
Country
[NOT SPECIFIED]

Configuration/Communication/Comm Board/Point to Point (see 7.4.5.3.2/p.98)


[Node Address]
Pump 1: pump number of PUMP-1
Pump 2: pump number of PUMP-2

Configuration/Prod Configuration (see 7.4.9/p.112)


Product: 1
Name: Product 1
Intern Num: 1
Extern Num: 1 (none zero)

Management/Delivery Mode (see 7.2.1/p.57)


[All Pumps]
● Connected
○Standalone

8.1.3. HARDWARE SETTINGS


For this comms board there are a few jumper settings:
- W101: Jumper between pin 1-2
- W202: Optional jumper to add an offset between both bus lines for larger noise reduction.
- W203: Jumper to terminate the bus with a typical impedance of Z0=100 Ohms by a resistor.

Copyright  2015 Tokheim


TQC Service Manual V12.3 Page 158 of 226
8.2. DUNCLARE
For Dunclare the ZSR board (Board ID: TQC029) is used.

8.2.1. COMMUNICATION TRANSMISSION SPECIFICATIONS


Baudrate: 2400
start bits: 1
data bits: 7
parity bit: 1 (even)
stop bit: 2

8.2.2. TQC SETTINGS


Setup/Communication (see 0/p.142)
[FCC Protocol]
Dunclare
Region
[EUROPE]
Country
[NOT SPECIFIED]

Configuration/Communication/Comm Board/Point to Point (see 7.4.5.3.2/p.98)


[Node Address]
Pump 1: pump number of PUMP-1
Pump 2: pump number of PUMP-2

Configuration/Prod Configuration (see 7.4.9/p.112)


Product: 1
Name: Product 1
Intern Num: 1
Extern Num: 1

Management/Delivery Mode (see 7.2.1/p.57)


[All Pumps]
● Connected
○Standalone

Configuration\Delivery Handling (see 7.4.16/p.122)


Finish Transaction On Nozzle Down: No

Copyright  2015 Tokheim


TQC Service Manual V12.3 Page 159 of 226
8.3. EIN
For EIN the dedicated EIN board (Board ID: TQC008) has to be used.

8.3.1. COMMUNICATION TRANSMISSION SPECIFICATIONS


Baudrate: 1200
start bits: 1
data bits: 8
parity bit: even
stop bit: 1

8.3.2. TQC SETTINGS


Setup/Communication (see 0/p.142)
[FCC Protocol]
EIN
Region
[EUROPE]
Country
[NOT SPECIFIED]

Configuration/Communication/Comm Board/Point to Point (see 7.4.5.3.2/p.98)


[Node Address]
Pump 1: pump number of PUMP-1
Pump 2: pump number of PUMP-2

Configuration/Prod Configuration (see 7.4.9/p.112)


Product: 1
Name: Product 1
Intern Num: 1
Extern Num: 1
Jupiter-POS/EURO-PC POS/DIALOG
Product 1 (nozzle-1) : 1
Product 2 (nozzle-2) : 2
Product 3 (nozzle-3) : 3
Product 4 (nozzle-4) : 4

Hermes-POS
Product 1 (nozzle-1) : 20 (here 20 means 0)
Product 2 (nozzle-2) :1
Product 3 (nozzle-3) :2
Product 4 (nozzle-4) :3

Other POS :
Product 1 (nozzle-1) :x (the external product code for product 1 is specific to brand)
Product 2 (nozzle-2) :y (the external product code for product 2 is specific to brand)
Product 3 (nozzle-3) :z (the external product code for product 3 is specific to brand)
Product 4 (nozzle-4) :w (the external product code for product 4 is specific to brand)

Management/Delivery Mode (see 7.2.1/p.57)


[All Pumps]
● Connected
○Standalone

Copyright  2015 Tokheim


TQC Service Manual V12.3 Page 160 of 226
8.4. EPS
For EPS the dedicated EPS board (Board ID: TQC010) has to be used.

8.4.1. COMMUNICATION TRANSMISSION SPECIFICATIONS


Baudrate: 1200
start bits: 1
data bits: 7
parity bit: even
stop bit: 2

8.4.2. TQC SETTINGS


Setup/Communication (see 0/p.142)
[FCC Protocol]
EPS
Region
[EUROPE]
Country
[NOT SPECIFIED]

Configuration/Communication/Comm Board/Point to Point (see 7.4.5.3.2/p.98)


[Node Address]
Pump 1: pump number of PUMP-1
Pump 2: pump number of PUMP-2

Configuration/Prod Configuration (see 7.4.9/p.112)


Name: Product 1
Intern Num: 1
Extern Num: 1

Management/Delivery Mode (see 7.2.1/p.57)


[All Pumps]
● Connected
○Standalone

Copyright  2015 Tokheim


TQC Service Manual V12.3 Page 161 of 226
8.5. GILBARCO
For Gilbarco the MTT/M32 board (Board ID: TQC031) has to be used.

8.5.1. COMMUNICATION TRANSMISSION SPECIFICATIONS


Baudrate: 5787
start bits: 1
data bits: 8
parity bit: even
stop bit: 1

8.5.2. TQC SETTINGS


Setup/Communication (see 0/p.142)
[FCC Protocol]
Gilbarco
Region
[EUROPE]
Country
[NOT SPECIFIED]

Configuration/Communication/Comm Board/Point to Point (see 7.4.5.3.2/p.98)


[Node Address]
Pump 1: pump number of PUMP-1
Pump 2: pump number of PUMP-2

Configuration/Prod Configuration (see 7.4.9/p.112)


Name: Product 1
Intern Num: 1
Extern Num: 1

Management/Delivery Mode (see 7.2.1/p.57)


[All Pumps]
● Connected
○Standalone

8.5.2.1. HARDWARE SETTINGS

Copyright  2015 Tokheim


TQC Service Manual V12.3 Page 162 of 226
8.6. KIENZLE
For Kienzle the dedicated Kienzle board (Board ID: TQC035) has to be used.

8.6.1. COMMUNICATION TRANSMISSION SPECIFICATIONS


Baudrate: 1200
start bits: 1
data bits: 8
parity bit: none
stop bit: 1

8.6.2. TQC SETTINGS


Setup/Communication (see 0/p.142)
[FCC Protocol]
Kienzle
Region
[EUROPE]
Country
[NOT SPECIFIED]

Configuration/Communication/Comm Board/Point to Point (see 7.4.5.3.2/p.98)


[Node Address]
Pump 1: pump number of PUMP-1
Pump 2: pump number of PUMP-2

Configuration/Prod Configuration (see 7.4.9/p.112)


Name: Product 1
Intern Num: 1
Extern Num: 1

Management/Delivery Mode (see 7.2.1/p.57)


[All Pumps]
● Connected
○Standalone

8.6.3. HARDWARE SETTINGS

Copyright  2015 Tokheim


TQC Service Manual V12.3 Page 163 of 226
8.7. LOGITRON
For Logitron the dedicated Logitron board (Board ID: TQC009) has to be used.

8.7.1. COMMUNICATION TRANSMISSION SPECIFICATIONS


Baudrate: 4800
start bits: 1
data bits: 7
parity bit: odd
stop bit: 1

8.7.2. TQC SETTINGS


Setup/Communication (see 0)
[FCC Protocol]
Logitron
Region
[EUROPE]
Country
[NOT SPECIFIED]

Configuration/Communication/Comm Board/Point to Point (see 7.4.5.3.2/p.98)


[Node Address]
Pump 1: pump number of PUMP-1
Pump 2: pump number of PUMP-2

Configuration/Prod Configuration (see 7.4.9/p.112)


Name: Product 1
Intern Num: 1
Extern Num: 1

Management/Delivery Mode (see 7.2.1/p.57)


[All Pumps]
● Connected
○Standalone

Copyright  2015 Tokheim


TQC Service Manual V12.3 Page 164 of 226
8.8. IFSF/LON
For LON the dedicated LON board (Board ID: TQC007) has to be used.

8.8.1. COMMUNICATION TRANSMISSION SPECIFICATIONS


LON bus: Free Form Topology FTT-10 at 78 Kbps
Data bus: IO0-107
Read/Write: R/W (signal manually generated by XC886)
Address line: A0 (“1”= control register / “0” = data register)
Chip Select: CS (signal manually generated by XC886)

8.8.2. TQC SETTINGS


Setup/Communication (see 0/p.142)
[FCC Protocol]
IFSF or IFSF over IP
Region
[EUROPE]
Country
[NOT SPECIFIED]

Configuration/Communication/Comm Board/Node Address (see 7.4.5.3.1/p.97)


Node: Please set to the pump number of PUMP-1

Configuration/Prod Configuration (see 7.4.9/p.112)


Product: 1
Name: Product 1
Intern Num: 1
Extern Num: x Depend on the POS controller type :

Product 1 : x (the external product code for product 1 is specific to brand)


Product 2 : y (the external product code for product 2 is specific to brand)
Product 3 : z (the external product code for product 3 is specific to brand)
Product 4 : w (the external product code for product 4 is specific to brand)

Management/Delivery Mode (see 7.2.1/p.57)


[All Pumps]
● Connected
○Standalone

Copyright  2015 Tokheim


TQC Service Manual V12.3 Page 165 of 226
8.9. IFSF/TCP-IP
For LON over TCP-IP there is no need for a communication board has to be used as the Ethernet port will be
used for IFSF communication over TCP-IP

8.9.1. TQC SETTINGS


Setup/Communication (see 0/p.142)
[FCC Protocol]
IFSF over IP
Region
[EUROPE]
Country
[NOT SPECIFIED]

Configuration/Communication/Comm Board/Node Address (see 7.4.5.3.1/p.97)


Node: Please set to the pump number of PUMP-1

Configuration/Communication/Network (see 7.4.5.2/p.97)


IP Address : 192.168.242.240 (IP address for TQC)
Subnet Mask : 255.255.240.0
Gateway : 192.168.242.1

Configuration/Communication/IFSF/IFSF Configuration (see 7.4.5.5/p.99)


○ Comm Board
● TCP/IP
Node Addr: Same as used Configuration/Communication/Comm Board/Node Address
Subnet Addr: Subnet where POS is located (default is 2)
HB Port: 3486 (default)
Server Port: 5000 (default)

Configuration/Communication/IFSF/IFSF Network (see 7.4.5.6/p.99)


IP Address : 192.168.242.224 (IP address for TQC-IFSF)
Subnet Mask : 255.255.240.0
Gateway : 192.168.242.1

Management/Delivery Mode (see 7.2.1/p.57)


[All Pumps]
● Connected
○Standalone

After the above setting you always need to switch of the main power of and on again so that new IP settings are
set.

Copyright  2015 Tokheim


TQC Service Manual V12.3 Page 166 of 226
8.10. NUOVO PIGONE
For Nuovo Pigone the dedicated NUP board (Board ID: TQC037) has to be used.

8.10.1. COMMUNICATION TRANSMISSION SPECIFICATIONS


Baudrate: 2400
start bits: 1
data bits: 8
parity bit: odd
stop bit: 1

8.10.2. TQC SETTINGS


Setup/Communication (see 0)
[FCC Protocol]
Nuovo Pignone
Region
[EUROPE]
Country
[NOT SPECIFIED]

Configuration\Communication\Comm Board (see 7.4.5.3.1)


Node Address
Node: 1

Configuration/Communication/Comm Board/Point to Point (see 7.4.5.3.2/p.98)


[Node Address]
Pump 1: pump number of PUMP-1
Pump 2: pump number of PUMP-2
[Use Address]
From TQC ■

Configuration/Prod Configuration (see 7.4.9/p.112)


Name: Product 1
Intern Num: 1
Extern Num: 1

Management/Delivery Mode (see 7.2.1/p.57)


[All Pumps]
● Connected
○Standalone

Copyright  2015 Tokheim


TQC Service Manual V12.3 Page 167 of 226
8.11. UDC/RS485
For UDC over RS485 the DART board (Board ID: TQC022) has to be used.

8.11.1. COMMUNICATION TRANSMISSION SPECIFICATIONS


Baudrate: 9600
start bits: 1
data bits: 8
parity bit: none
stop bit: 1

8.11.2. TQC SETTINGS


Setup/Communication (see 0)
[FCC Protocol]
UDC RS485
Region
[EUROPE]
Country
[NOT SPECIFIED]

Configuration/Communication/Comm Board/Point to Point (see 7.4.5.3.2/p.98)


[Node Address]
Pump 1: pump number of PUMP-1
Pump 2: pump number of PUMP-2
[UDC ID]
Pump 1: 96 (default) OR 92 (5 product) OR 36 (CEM44)
Pump 2: 96 (default) OR 92 (5 product) OR 36 (CEM44)
[Pos Timeout]
10 sec (default 10 sec, min 1 sec, max 60 sec)
[Running Trans Freq]
20 tenth of sec (default 20, min 0, max 255)

Configuration/Prod Configuration (see 7.4.9/p.112)


Name: Product 1
Intern Num: 1
Extern Num: 1

Management/Delivery Mode (see 7.2.1/p.57)


[All Pumps]
● Connected
○Standalone

Setup\System Setup\Country Setup\Volume Scaling (see 0 on 142)


[Volume times 10]
Delivery Volume
○Disabled
●Enabled
Totals Volume
●Disabled
○Enabled

8.11.3. HARDWARE SETTINGS


For this comms board there are a few jumper settings:
- W101: Jumper between pin 1-2
- W202: Optional jumper to add an offset between both bus lines for larger noise reduction.
- W203: Jumper to terminate the bus with a typical impedance of Z0=100 Ohms by a resistor.

Copyright  2015 Tokheim


TQC Service Manual V12.3 Page 168 of 226
8.12. UDC
For UDC the dedicated UDC board (Board ID: TQC104) has to be used.

8.12.1. COMMUNICATION TRANSMISSION SPECIFICATIONS


Baudrate: 9600
start bits: 1
data bits: 8
parity bit: none
stop bit: 1

8.12.2. TQC SETTINGS


Setup/Communication (see 0)
[FCC Protocol]
UDC
Region
[EUROPE]
Country
[NOT SPECIFIED]

Configuration/Communication/Comm Board/Point to Point (see 7.4.5.3.2/p.98)


[Node Address]
Pump 1: pump number of PUMP-1
Pump 2: pump number of PUMP-2
[UDC ID]
Pump 1: 96 (default) OR 92 (5 product) OR 36 (CEM44)
Pump 2: 96 (default) OR 92 (5 product) OR 36 (CEM44)
[Pos Timeout]
10 sec (default 10 sec, min 1 sec, max 60 sec)
[Running Trans Freq]
20 tenth of sec (default 20, min 0, max 255)

Configuration/Prod Configuration (see 7.4.9/p.112)


Name: Product 1
Intern Num: 1
Extern Num: 1

Management/Delivery Mode (see 7.2.1/p.57)


[All Pumps]
● Connected
○Standalone

Setup\System Setup\Country Setup\Volume Scaling (see 0 on 142)


[Volume times 10]
Delivery Volume
○Disabled
●Enabled
Totals Volume
●Disabled
○Enabled

Copyright  2015 Tokheim


TQC Service Manual V12.3 Page 169 of 226
8.13. ZSR
For ZSR the ZSR board (Board ID: TQC029) has to be used.

8.13.1. COMMUNICATION TRANSMISSION SPECIFICATIONS


Baudrate: 9600
start bits: 1
data bits: 8
parity bit: none
stop bit: 2

8.13.2. TQC SETTINGS


Setup/Communication (see 0/p.142)
[FCC Protocol]
ZSR
Region
[EUROPE]
Country
[NOT SPECIFIED]

Configuration/Communication/Comm Board/Point to Point (see 7.4.5.3.2/p.98)


[Node Address]
Pump 1: pump number of PUMP-1
Pump 2: pump number of PUMP-2

Configuration/Prod Configuration (see 7.4.9/p.112)


Name: Product 1
Intern Num: 1
Extern Num: 1

Management/Delivery Mode (see 7.2.1/p.57)


[All Pumps]
● Connected
○Standalone

Copyright  2015 Tokheim


TQC Service Manual V12.3 Page 170 of 226
9. TROUBLESHOOTING
This section explains how to read the errors from the displays and how to replace parts or shut down/restart the
TQC.

9.1. DISPLAY ERROR INFORMATION


The errors will be displayed as shown in Figure 60. They are described in section 10.

Module ID
Error code

Module ID
Error code
TQC error message

Figure 60: Error messages on different displays/screens

Error Message:
If an error has occurred in the system, ERROR is displayed on the screen (VGA).

Mod ID:
When an error has occurred, a module identification (Mod ID) number is shown in the Amount field.

Error code:
When an error has occurred, an error code is shown in the Volume field. This is a sub-error of the Mod ID.

Sequence of Interpreting:
Figure 60 shows an example of an error. The first thing the user must look at is the Mod ID, then the error code.
In this example the Mod ID = 61 which means there is something wrong on the module HYM MANAGER FOR
Pump A. Then the error code = 111 which means an Under-current was detected on the primary fuel motor.

9.2. SHUTDOWN/RESTART TQC


To shut down the TQC, switch MAINS off, do not disconnect battery, and wait for the system to power down.
Depending on the configuration, this can take up to 15 minutes.

To restart the TQC, switch MAINS off, do not disconnect battery, wait for the system to report the MAINS OFF
error on display (Mod ID = 0, error code = 1), switch MAINS back on and wait for the TQC to restart.

9.3. REPLACING CAN PARTS


Before changing any hardware, the TQC must be shut down to prevent damage.

Copyright  2015 Tokheim


TQC Service Manual V12.3 Page 171 of 226
When CAN devices need to be replaced, be aware that after connecting a new CAN device, the new CAN
device will not automatically get an address after power-up. To get the right CAN addresses, use the HHT and
select Configuration > Communication > CAN > Auto Configuration. CAN addressing will start.

After the CAN devices receive their CAN addresses, the TQC must be restarted to update the software in the
CAN devices. This is done automatically during startup. Always check with the HHT (Configuration > Software
Info > CAN Devices Modules and select the replaced CAN device) to make sure the right software version is
installed in the CAN device.

10. MOD IDS AND ERROR CODES


All Mod IDs and error codes are explained in the following sections.

10.1. MOD IDS


SOFTWARE MODULE (0000-0999) Mod ID
GENERAL 0
PROCESS MANAGER 10
CONFIGURATION MANAGER 11
DATABASE MANAGER 13
FILE TRANSFER MANAGER 14
CONFIGURATION HANDLER 22
PUMP MANAGER A 51
PUMP MANAGER B 52
PUMP MANAGER C 53
PUMP MANAGER D 54
HYM MANAGER FOR PUMP A 61
HYM MANAGER FOR PUMP B 62
HYM MANAGER FOR PUMP C 63
HYM MANAGER FOR PUMP D 64
VR MANAGER FOR PUMP A 71
VR MANAGER FOR PUMP B 72
VR MANAGER FOR PUMP C 73
VR MANAGER FOR PUMP D 74
PROTOCOL HANDLER FOR PUMP A 91
PROTOCOL HANDLER FOR PUMP B 92
PROTOCOL HANDLER FOR PUMP C 93
PROTOCOL HANDLER FOR PUMP D 94
DISPLAY HANDLER 110

Copyright  2015 Tokheim


TQC Service Manual V12.3 Page 172 of 226
HARDWARE MODULE(1000-9999) Mod ID
PRE PROCESSOR 1200
CAN DISPLAY MASTER A 1300
CAN DISPLAY SLAVE A 1301
CAN DISPLAY MASTER B 1302
CAN DISPLAY SLAVE B 1303
CAN DISPLAY MASTER C 1304
CAN DISPLAY SLAVE C 1305
CAN DISPLAY MASTER D 1306
CAN DISPLAY SLAVE D 1307
PULSER METER 1 1400
PULSER METER 2 1401
PULSER METER 3 1402
PULSER METER 4 1403
PULSER METER 5 1404
PULSER METER 6 1405
PULSER METER 7 1406
PULSER METER 8 1407
PULSER METER 9 1408
PULSER METER 10 1409
PULSER METER 11 1410
PULSER METER 12 1411
PULSER METER 13 1412
PULSER METER 14 1413
PULSER METER 15 1414
PULSER METER 16 1415
HYM 1 1500
HYM 2 1501
HYM 3 1502
HYM 4 1503
HYM 5 1504
HYM 6 1505
VCC BOARD FOR PUMP A & B 1600
VCC BOARD FOR PUMP C & D 1601
COMM BOARD PRIMARY 1700
COMM BOARD SECONDARY 1701
SLAVE I/O ( SIO ) 1 ( cable position 1 ) 1800
SLAVE I/O ( SIO ) 2 ( cable position 2 ) 1801
SLAVE I/O ( SIO ) 3 ( cable position 3 ) 1802
SLAVE I/O ( SIO ) 4 ( cable position 4 ) 1803

Copyright  2015 Tokheim


TQC Service Manual V12.3 Page 173 of 226
10.2. ERROR CODES
This section lists the errors per module. CAN communication errors are handled a little differently as they can
affect multiple process and hardware modules. BUS termination is critical, as are all devices having valid
software flashed into it. One defective device can cause a group of devices (or all devices) to have
communication problems. Isolate the problem via a process of elimination, disconnecting more and more
hardware until the problem is resolved.
Remember that hardware may never be hot-wired or unplugged while powered.
The severity of an error ID will be shown using the colours in the following table:

Colour Minor Error


Colour Major Error

In principle minor errors will not interrupt deliveries, whereas major errors will. In both cases the
product/nozzle/PUMP will not be blocked (except in defined cases, for example, x consecutive zero deliveries,
VR timer elapsed, SD card insert / eject).

10.2.1. GENERAL ERROR CODES 00-99 (MOD ID = 0)


Error ID Name Error ID Root Cause Solution
Number
MAINS_OFF 1 Mains power has been lost; the Check the 220V power supply.
calculator is running on battery
power only
MAINS_LOW 2 Mains power is too low
MAINS_HIGH 3 Mains power is too high
BACKUP_BATTERY_FAILURE 4 Backup battery is broken or Check whether the battery is
disconnected connected and replace it if necessary.
BACKUP_BATTERY_LOW 5 Backup battery power level is Battery is probably end-of life; replace.
low
RTC_BATTERY_FAILURE 6 Real-Time-Clock battery is Replace the RTC battery (on APB
broken or not present board, under the cover) and check the
calculator's date and time.
FPGA_RESET 7 FPGA's logic is failing and in System automatically recovers. If the
need of re-programming, situation persists, reboot the calculator
possibly as a result of an ESD and try to find ESD sources near the
spike calculator.

Copyright  2015 Tokheim


TQC Service Manual V12.3 Page 174 of 226
10.2.2. SOFTWARE MODULE SPECIFIC ERRORS 100-999 (MOD ID = 0001–
0999)
10.2.3. PROCESS MANAGER ERRORS (MOD ID = 10)
Error ID Name Error ID Root Cause Solution
Number
PROCM_CAN_BUS_EMERGENCY_ERROR 18 A CAN bus error has Check CAN termination and
been detected; ARM9 whether all activity LEDs
communication with are blinking. Disconnect
peripherals is not various CAN hardware to
guaranteed isolate the problem; replace
PROCM_PERIPH_SW_UPD_ERROR 19 A Peripheral SW Update faulty hardware.
error has been detected;
ARM9 communication
with peripherals is not
guaranteed
PROCM_DATA_CONVERSION_ERROR 101 Conversion of data-files
(XML/DB) failed
PROCM_PROC_CANDEV_SW_UPD_SKIPPED 110 CAN device software
update skipped; Off-Line
device (or device in
BootLoadingMode)
detected
PROCM_PROC_HEARTBEAT_EXPIRED 700 A process did not The calculator will reboot. If
respond to heartbeat the problem persists,
requests for too long a contact third-level support
time and mention the TQC
PROCM_PROC_CRASHED 900 A process on the software version and exact
calculator has crashed dispenser configuration,
country installed and
communication protocol
used.

10.2.3.1.CONFIGURATION MANAGER (MOD ID = 11) OR CONFIGURATION


HANDLER ERROR (MOD ID = 22)
Error ID Name Error ID Root Cause Solution
Number
CFG_MPC_CONFIG_PARAM_LIMIT 18

10.2.3.2.DATABASE MANAGER ERRORS (MOD ID = 13)


Error ID Name Error ID Root Cause Solution
Number
DATABASE_CREATION_ERROR 100 Database cannot be created
DATABASE_INTEGRITY_ERROR 101 SQL Integrity check of a database
failed
DATABASE_AUTHENTICITY_ERROR 102 Database file authentication record did
not match the database file, fraud
DATABASE_CALCULATE_LOCAL_TOTALS_ERROR 103 Calculate local totals failed
DATABASE_RAM_TO_FLASH_ERROR 104 RAM to flash failed
DATABASE_DELETE_TABLE_ERROR 105 Delete table failed
DATABASE_DELETE_FILE_ERROR 106 Delete file failed
DATABASE_RETRIEVE_FILE_ERROR 107 Retrieve file failed
DATABASE_STORE_FILE_ERROR 108 Store file failed
DATABASE_XML_FILE_ERROR 109 XML file failed
DATABASE_UPDATE_DATA_ERROR 110 Update data failed
DATABASE_RESTORE_DATA_ERROR 111 Restore data failed

Copyright  2015 Tokheim


TQC Service Manual V12.3 Page 175 of 226
Error ID Name Error ID Root Cause Solution
Number
DATABASE_QUERY_ERROR 112 Query failed
DATABASE_REQUEST_ERROR 113 Request failed
DATABASE_PUT_CONFIG_ERROR 114 Put config failed
DATABASE_GET_CONFIG_ERROR 115 Get config failed
DATABASE_NEXT_RECORD_ERROR 116 Next record failed
DATABASE_FULL_BACKUP_ERROR 117 Full backup failed
DATABASE_DELETE_QUEUE_TICKET_ERROR 118 Delete queue ticket failed
DATABASE_START_SHIFT_ERROR 119 Start shift failed
DATABASE_COPY_FILE_ERROR 120 Copy file failed
DATABASE_CONVERT_DATA_ITEM_ERROR 121 Data item not found in convert.db

10.2.3.3.FILE TRANSFER MANAGER ERRORS (MOD ID = 14)


Error ID Name Error ID Root Cause Solution
Number
ILLEGAL_SD_CARD_EJECT 8 Illegal SD card The dispenser is blocked for further deliveries
eject was (PUMP will generate error
detected PUMP_NOZZLE_BLOCKED_SD_
CARD_EJECT_ERR). Unblock all PUMPs in the
dispenser status menu.
ILLEGAL_SD_CARD_INSERT 9 Illegal SD card
insert was
detected
NO_SD_CARD_INSERTED 10 The requested Insert an SD card.
action requires an
SD card to be
inserted
WRITE_PROTECTED_SD_CARD 11 The requested Put the SD card in writable mode (using the
action requires a small switch on its side).
writable SD card
to be inserted
SD_CARD_ACCESS_FAILED 12 TQC could not Insert another SD card and analyze the
access the file corrupted card via a PC.
system on the SD
card (mount
failed)
FILE_BACKUP_ERROR 13 A file failed to be Attempt the backup operation again. If the
backed up to the problem persists, try a different SD card.
SD card
FILE_RESTORE_ERROR 14 A file failed to be Attempt the restore operation again or select a
restored from the different backup to restore from.
SD card
FILE_CORRUPT_ERROR 15 A file on the TQC Reboot the TQC and try again. If the problem
is corrupted, persists, a cold start or restore might be
preventing a necessary.
backup to be
made
SD_CARD_NOT_INTEGER 17 Integrity of the SD Insert the correct SD card or unblock the integrity
card is broken via the dispenser status menu (PUMP will
generate error
PUMP_NOZZLE_BLOCKED_SD_
CARD_INTEGRITY_ERR until unblocked).

10.2.3.4.IO HANDLER ERRORS (MOD ID 15)


Error ID name Error ID Root Cause Solution
Number

Copyright  2015 Tokheim


TQC Service Manual V12.3 Page 176 of 226
Error ID name Error ID Root Cause Solution
Number
IOH_RECONFIG_IO_OLD_VERSION 150 The IO configuration file (layout) is IOHandler
outdated requires re-
configuration
IOH_RECONFIG_IO_OLD_LIBRARY 151 The software library / libraries is / Perform software
are out of date (incorrect update
version(s))
IOH_RECONFIG_IO_MISSING_CONTENT 152 The IO configuration misses Corrupted IO
(critical) content scheme files
IOH_RECONFIG_IO_RESERVED_CONTENT 153 The IO configuration defines IO at Corrupted IO
reserved (physical) locations scheme files
IOH_RECONFIG_OUT_OF_MEMORY 154 Out of memory when re- Reboot TQC
generating the IO configuration or
reading it
IOH_RECONFIG_HYDRAULIC_PROBLEM 155 Hydraulic setup is not unique; Re-generate
some or all hydraulic components hydraulic setup
cannot be controlled / addressed
IOH_RECONFIG_METER_ASSIGNMENTS 156 Problem parsing meter Re-generate
assignments for a HYM; hydraulic hydraulic setup
setup seems incorrect
IOH_RECONFIG_PRODUCT_ASSIGNMENTS 157 Problem parsing product Re-generate
assignments for a HYM; hydraulic hydraulic setup
setup seems incorrect
IOH_RECONFIG_IO_PROBLEM 158 Some IO configuration is not IOHandler
unique or sorted; some IO cannot requires re-
be controlled / addressed configuration
IOH_RECONFIG_UNKNOWN_PLATFORM 159 Hardware platform (for example, Perform software
EIO or EST) is not recognized (by update
this version of software)
IOH_RECONFIG_READ_OP_SETUP 160 Failed to read setup items that are Reboot TQC
relevant for generating the IO and
hydraulic setup
IOH_RECONFIG_HYM_NAME_NOT_FOUND 161 A HYM name that is assigned Re-generate
could not be found in the list of hydraulic setup
HYM definitions; cannot assign
hydraulics
IOH_RECONFIG_DBM_READ_PROBLEM 162 Failed to read relevant information Reboot TQC
from database (relevant for
loading / generating the
configuration)
IOH_RECONFIG_DBM_STORE_PROBLEM 163 Failed to store relevant Reboot TQC
information to database (nozzle
database items, IO configuration
file)
IOH_RECONFIG_ACTIVATE_IO_SETUP 164 Failed to activate the correct IO / Re-activate
button setup scheme default files
IOH_RECONFIG_ACTIVATE_DEF_IO 165 Failed to activate the default IO Re-activate
controls (like battery test, mains default files
detect, etc)
IOH_RECONFIG_GEN_SEND_DEVICE_SETUP 166 Failed to generate or send (CAN) IOHandler
device setup requires re-
configuration
IOH_RECONFIG_IO_NOT_CREATED 167 Failed to create the IO IOHandler
configuration file (general error) requires re-
configuration

10.2.3.5.FILLING POINT MANAGER ERRORS (MOD ID = 51–54)


Mod ID = 51 for PUMP A, 52 for PUMP B, 53 for PUMP C, 54 for PUMP D

Copyright  2015 Tokheim


TQC Service Manual V12.3 Page 177 of 226
Error ID Name Error ID Root Cause Solution
Number
PUMP_UNIT_PRICE_ERROR 100 Invalid unit price Connect the
POS to get
lthe atest unit
price. In the
case of
standalone,
use the HHT
to enter the
correct unit
price
PUMP_PRESET_REACHED_ERROR 101 Event that the preset is NA
reached
PUMP_AUTHORISE_TIMEOUT 102 Nozzle not taken within the Take nozzle
time allowed after reception of faster after
authorization from POS authorization
PUMP_MAX_FILL_TIMEOUT 103 Delivery takes too much time Shorten
delivery
PUMP_NO_PROGRESS_TIMEOUT 104 Delivery is running but no Continue
volume updates are received delivery within
within the no progress timer time
PUMP_FUELLING_SUSPENDED 105 Event that delivery is NA
suspended
PUMP_FUELLING_RESUMED 106 Event that delivery is resumed NA
PUMP_MAX_VOLUME 107 Event that the maximum NA
station volume is reached
PUMP_MAX_USER_VOLUME 108 Event that the maximum user NA
volume is reached
PUMP_MAX_SUSPEND_TIMEOUT 109 Delivery is suspended for too Resume
long delivery at a
faster rate
PUMP_NOZZLE_OUT X110 Nozzle X is already out Put nozzle X
back
PUMP_WRONG_PRODUCT_ERROR 111
PUMP_MAX_NB_ZERO_TRANSACTION 112 Nozzle blocked due to Reset with
maximum of zero deliveries HHT
received
PUMP_TANK_LEVEL_LOW 113 Tank level of taken nozzle is Call supplier
low
PUMP_LPG_BUTTON_TIMEOUT 114 Dead man's button released
too long
PUMP_LPG_NOZZLE_TIMEOUT 115 Dead man's button released
too long
PUMP_START_BUTTON_TIMEOUT 116 Dead man's button released
too long
PUMP_MAX_NB_NOZZLE_TAKEN 117 Nozzle blocked due to Reset with
maximum of zero deliveries HHT
received
PUMP_PIN_CODE_ERROR 118 Wrong PIN code
PUMP_MAX_PIN_CODE_ERROR 119 Max number of wrong PIN
codes
PUMP_SW_UPD_NOT_PERFORMED 120 Peripheral software update not Some
performed at startup peripheral is
off-line
PUMP_COLDSTART_SW_ON 121 Cold-start switch is in the On
position!
PUMP_STORE_TOTAL_ERROR 122 Totals cannot be stored in the
database
PUMP_RETRIEVE_TOTAL_ERROR 123 Totals cannot be retrieved

Copyright  2015 Tokheim


TQC Service Manual V12.3 Page 178 of 226
Error ID Name Error ID Root Cause Solution
Number
from the database
PUMP_PRESET_ERROR_MIN_MAX 150 Entered local preset too high Adjust preset
or too low according to the value
station settings
PUMP_PRESET_AMO_COMMA_ERROR 151 Comma error in the preset Fix with HHT
amount
PUMP_PRESET_VOL_COMMA_ERROR 152 Comma error in the preset
volume
PUMP_PRESET_ERROR_MIN_AMO 153 Remote preset amount too low Adjust preset
according to the station value
settings
PUMP_PRESET_ERROR_MIN_VOL 154 Remote preset volume too low
according to the station
settings
PUMP_DENSITY_ERR 160
PUMP_NOZZLE_BLOCKED_MANUAL_ERR 161 Manual blocking of this nozzle Unblock via
/ PUMP is active dispenser
PUMP_NOZZLE_BLOCKED_SD_CARD_EJECT_ERR 162 PUMP is blocked due to an status menu
illegal SD card eject; see File
Transfer Manager error
ILLEGAL_SD_CARD_EJECT
PUMP_NOZZLE_BLOCKED_SD_CARD_ 163 PUMP is blocked due to
INTEGRITY_ERR invalid SD card integrity; see
File Transfer Manager error
SD_CARD_NOT_INTEGER
PUMP_NOZZLE_BLOCKED_RUNNING_ 164
ON_BATTERY_ERR
PUMP_NOZZLE_BLOCKED_INTEGRITY_ERR 165 Can be
unblocked in
maintenance
menu
PUMP_NOZZLE_BLOCKED_INTERLOCK_ERR 166 Can be
unblocked in
maintenance
menu
PUMP_NOZZLE_BLOCKED_TAX_UP_ERR 167 Can be
unblocked in
maintenance
menu
PUMP_NOZZLE_BLOCKED_RECEIPT_ 168 Can be
NOT_PRINTED unblocked in
maintenance
menu
PUMP_NOZZLE_BLOCKED_SW_RESET 169 PUMP is blocked because
TQC is waiting for a reset (all
PUMPs need to be idle)
PUMP_NO_VALID_NOZZLE_ERROR 170 Taken nozzle is not enabled in
mask
PUMP_NO_VALID_PRODUCT_ERROR 171 Product not found for taken
nozzle
PUMP_NOZZLE_BLOCKED_TEST_DEL_RUNNING 172 This PUMP is blocked Will be
because a test delivery is unblocked
running on the other side when the test
delivery on
the other side
is finished
PUMP_SWITCH_BUZZER_MSG_ERR 173 Error sending a buzzer
message

Copyright  2015 Tokheim


TQC Service Manual V12.3 Page 179 of 226
Error ID Name Error ID Root Cause Solution
Number
PUMP_SEND_KEYPAD_MSG_ERR 174 Error switching keypad
PUMP_NOZZLE_BLOCKED_IDLE_VOLUME 175 Pulses detected at a not Can be
authorized Pulser (idle unblocked in
volume) maintenance
menu
PUMP_NOZZLE_BLOCKED_REASON_UNKNOWN 176 Unknown reason for blocking Can be
unblocked in
maintenance
menu

Can not update multiple UPD


PUMP_UPD_PROD_INFO_ERR 177
prod info

Product blocked additive level Fill additive


PUMP_BLOCKED_EMPTY_ADDITIVE 179
is empty product
FIP_IDLE_VOLUME_ERR 180 No volume updates after idle Don’t stop
volume timer was elapsed. fueling to
long.
PUMP_CHANGE_TRANSACTION_STATE_ERR 200 PUMP cannot change the
transaction state
PUMP_REPORT_TRANSACTION_STATE2PROT_ERR 201 Transaction state cannot be
reported to protocol
PUMP_GET_NEXT_TRANSACTION_BUF_ERR 202 No new transaction buffer
available
PUMP_GET_CUR_TRANSACTION_BUF_ERR 203 Error getting current
transaction buffer
PUMP_INIT_TRANSACTION_BUF_ERR 204 Transaction buffer cannot be
initialized
PUMP_FINALIZE_TRANSACTION_BUF_ERR 205 Transaction buffer cannot be
finalized
PUMP_GET_CURRENT_TRANSACTION_DATA_ERR 206 Error getting information from
current transaction
PUMP_READ_CONF_ERR 207 Configuration database cannot
be read
PUMP_OIML_ERR 208 OIML test error
PUMP_OIML_TIMEOUT_ERR 209 OIML test not performed in
time
PUMP_CHANGE_PUMP_STATE_ERR 210 PUMP state change not
performed
PUMP_CHANGE_LOGICAL_NOZZLE_STATE_ERR 211 State of nozzle cannot be
changed
PUMP_REPORT_STATE2PROT_ERR 212 New state cannot be reported
to protocol
PUMP_REPORT_NOZZLE_BLOCK_TIMER_ 213 Status of nozzle block timer
STATUS_ERR cannot be reported
PUMP_REPORT_VR_STATUS2PROT 214 Vapour recovery status cannot
be reported to protocol
PUMP_READ_VR_STATUS_ERR 215 Vapour recovery status cannot
be read
PUMP_REQ_BAT_STATE_ERR 216 Battery state cannot be read
PUMP_UPD_UP_ERR 217 Unit price display cannot be
updated
PUMP_REP_ERR2PROT 218 Error report to protocol not
possible
PUMP_RESET_DISP_ERR 219 Display cannot be reset
PUMP_UPD_DISP_ERR 220 Unit price cannot be displayed

Copyright  2015 Tokheim


TQC Service Manual V12.3 Page 180 of 226
Error ID Name Error ID Root Cause Solution
Number
PUMP_SHOW_LAST_DEL_ERR 221 Last delivery cannot be
displayed
PUMP_SHOW_PROD_NAME_ERR 222 Product name cannot be
displayed
PUMP_OPEN_HM_ERR 223 HM cannot be opened
PUMP_OPEN_VR_ERR 224 VR cannot be opened
PUMP_START_HM_ERR 225 HM cannot be started
PUMP_CLOSE_HM_ERR 226 HM cannot be closed
PUMP_SUSP_HM_ERR 227 HM cannot be suspended
PUMP_RESUME_HM_ERR 228 HM cannot be resumed
PUMP_CLOSE_VR_ERR 229 VR cannot be closed
PUMP_SWITCH_HS_ERR 230 High speed cannot be
switched on
PUMP_SW_MBACKL_ERR 231 Volume or amount display
backlight cannot be switched
on
PUMP_SW_UBACKL_ERR 232 Unit price display backlight
cannot be switched on
PUMP_SW_ILIGHT_ERR 233 Indication light cannot be
switched on
PUMP_LEAK_TEST_INTERRUPTED 234 Nozzle out during pre leak test
PUMP_HM_NOT_RSP_ERR 235 HM does not respond
PUMP_VR_NOT_RSP_ERR 236 VR does not respond
PUMP_BAT_TEST_TIMEOUT_ERR 238 Battery test timed out
PUMP_VOLUPD_SUSP_ERR 239 Volume updated received
while suspended
PUMP_MM_PRESET_ERR 241 Minimum/maximum preset
cannot be retrieved from
database
PUMP_MAX_VOL_ERR 242 Maximum volume cannot be
retrieved from database
PUMP_GET_REM_PRE_ERR 243 Remote preset cannot be
retrieved from database
PUMP_SHOW_PRESET_ERR 244 Local preset cannot be
displayed
PUMP_LEAK_ERR 245 Leak error
PUMP_LEAK_MES_ERR 246 Leak test message cannot be
send to HM
PUMP_GET_NOZZLE_TABLE_ERR 247 Nozzle table cannot be
retrieved from database
PUMP_PRESET_OVERSHOOT_ERR 248 Preset overshoot
PUMP_CHG_PRE_ERR 249 Preset value cannot be
changed
PUMP_SLOW_FLOW_ERR 250
PUMP_NOZZLE_IN_CLOSE 251 Nozzle out dispenser not
ready
PUMP_INFO_HM_ERR 252
PUMP_SWITCH_INTERLOCK_MSG_ERR 253
PUMP_CSD_MODULE_ERR 254

10.2.3.6.HYDRAULIC MANAGER ERRORS (MOD ID = 61–64)


Mod ID = 61 for PUMP A, 62 for PUMP B, 63 for PUMP A, 64 for PUMP D.

Over-current denotes a short circuit or mechanical failure.


Under-current denotes a disconnection or thermal error.

Copyright  2015 Tokheim


TQC Service Manual V12.3 Page 181 of 226
Error ID Name Error ID Root Cause Solution
Number
HM_PULSER_TESTS_NOT_OK_ERROR 100 After pulser test time, before Replace pulser(s)
a delivery, the mode of the
pulser(s) to be used is/are not
changed into DELIVERY
mode
HM_DISPLAY_COMMUNICATION_ERROR 101 20 successive missed Power down/up TQC
responses from Display
Manager; the Display
Manager may have crashed
HM_EMT_BROKEN_ERROR 102 IOHandler is not sure that Replace EMT counter
EMT update is successful
HM_2_CL_PRESET_OVERSHOOT_ERROR 103 A broken preset valve or Replace preset valve
wrong preset valve response
setting
HM_30_CL_PRESET_OVERSHOOT_ERROR 104 A broken preset valve
HM_STORE_TOTAL_ERROR 105 Communication problem with Power down and then
database manager during up
calculation of the totals
HM_OC_FUEL_MOTOR_PRIMARY_ERROR 106 Over-current detected on the Search for the
primary fuel motor reason; replace the
HM_OC_FUEL_MOTOR_SECONDARY_ERROR 107 Over-current detected on the motor if necessary
secondary fuel motor
HM_OC_VALVE_ERROR 108 Over-current detected on a Search for the
fuel valve reason; replace the
HM_OC_VALVE_MASTER_ERROR 109 Over-current detected on a valve if necessary
master fuel valve
HM_OC_VALVE_SLAVE_ERROR 110 Over-current detected on a
slave fuel valve
HM_UC_FUEL_MOTOR_PRIMARY_ERROR 111 Under-current detected on Search for
the primary fuel motor disconnected motor
HM_UC_FUEL_MOTOR_SECONDARY_ERROR 112 Under-current detected on connections; replace
the secondary fuel motor the motor if
necessary
HM_UC_VALVE_ERROR 113 Under-current detected on a Search for
fuel valve disconnected valve
HM_UC_VALVE_MASTER_ERROR 114 Under-current detected on a connections; replace
master fuel valve the valve if necessary
HM_UC_VALVE_SLAVE_ERROR 115 Under-current detected on a
slave fuel valve
HM_RETRIEVE_TOTAL_ERROR 116
HM_FINAL_VOLUME_LOWER_THAN_LAST 117
HM_PRE_LEAK_ERROR 118
HM_PRE_FATAL_LEAK_ERROR 119
HM_OC_PULSER_ERROR 120 Over-current of a pulser Check the pulser
detected connections; replace
pulser if necessary
HM_PP_LOST_ERROR 121
HM_CORRUPTED_VOLUME_ERROR 122 Corrupted volume detected
HM_DISPLAY_ROLLOVER_ERROR 123 Trying to display a larger
volume/amount as possible
with current display layout.
HM_START_WRONG_NOZZLE_ERROR 124 Trying to start an hm with a
different LNO as it was
opened with. (caused by
nozzle juggling)
Note: Only one detection of Over-current is present on a HYM (for max two connected pulsers).

10.2.3.7.VAPOUR RECOVERY MANAGER ERRORS (MOD ID = 71–74)


Copyright  2015 Tokheim
TQC Service Manual V12.3 Page 182 of 226
Mod ID = 71 for PUMP A, 72 for PUMP B, 73 for PUMP A, 74 for PUMP D.

Over-current denotes a short circuit or mechanical failure.


Under-current denotes a disconnection or thermal error.

Error ID Name Error ID Root Cause Solution


Number
VR_MOTOR_OC_ERROR 100 VR pump motor Over-current Search for the reason;
detected replace motor if necessary
VR_MOTOR_UC_ERROR 101 VR pump motor Under-current Search for disconnected
detected motor connections; replace
motor if necessary
VR_FLOW_VALVE_OC_ERROR 102 VR proportional valve Over- Search for the reason;
current detected replace valve if necessary
VR_FLOW_VALVE_UC_ERROR 103 VR proportional valve Under- Search for disconnected
current detected valve connections; replace
valve if necessary
VR_RETURN_VALVE_OC_ERROR 104 VR return per product valve Search for the reason;
Over-current detected replace valve if necessary
VR_RETURN_VALVE_UC_ERROR 105 VR return per product valve Search for disconnected
Under-current detected valve connections; replace
valve if necessary
VR_RETURN_VALVE_OFF_ERROR 106 VR return per product valve If the problem happens
closed by HYM (in-delivery multiple times, call third-
timeout) level support
VR_DEVICE_CONTROL_ERROR 110 SCG: VCC not connected / not Check that VCC is live and
calibrated / not CAN terminated its software version
/ not the correct software
(version)
OL & SCG: The HYM where Check that HYM is live
the return valve is connected is
unresponsive
Motor / valve control failed Check that FPGA is live
IOHandler is running in cold Check cold start state /
start mode, does not have a IOHandler startup log that
valid configuration for other states the IOHandler does
reasons or is not running at all not use an initial minimal
configuration
VR_DEVICE_CONTROL_TIMEOUT 111 The control of all the necessary Check that VCC, HYM and
devices took longer than FPGA are live
required
VR_NOT_CALIBRATED 112 At least one of the VR nozzles Perform calibration: For OL,
on the current PUMP is not connect Gallus; for SCG,
calibrated for VR no Gallus is needed
VR_NO_HW_AND_VR_NOZZLES 113 VR nozzles are defined but no Connect the ECRV option
VR hardware is connected board or disable all VR
nozzles from the
configuration
VR_NOZZLE_BLOCK_TIMER_STARTED 114 Nozzle block timer started Validate the configured VR
because the bad efficiency block criteria parameters,
counter exceeded its re-calibrate this nozzle,
configured maximum count validate correct functioning
VR_NOZZLE_BLOCK_TIMER_ELAPSED 115 Time before block has expired of VR peripherals
after the previous error
VR_INVALID_CONFIG 117 The current configuration Validate configuration
cannot be used by the VR parameters in the VR
Manager; see associated error configuration menu
text for more details
VR_SCG_MODE_SET_TO_OL_MODE 118 SCG mode could not be Reboot the TQC and see
initialized due to memory errors whether the problem is

Copyright  2015 Tokheim


TQC Service Manual V12.3 Page 183 of 226
Error ID Name Error ID Root Cause Solution
Number
during the associated table resolved. If not, replace the
update; the self calibrating processor board.
mode could not continue so it
was set to OL mode
VR_CONFIG_READ_ERROR 119 Failed to read the configuration
from the database manager
VR_VCC_START_ERROR 121 Failed to start measurements Validate if VCC
on the VCC communication is OK and if
it is calibrated. Call third-
level support if the problem
persists.
VR_VCC_NOT_CONFIGURED 122 Operational VCC is not stated Re-run auto / single
as active VCC node in the configuration
Op.CAN file
VR_VCC_NOT_DETECTED 125 VCC (operational and/or Re-run auto / single
default address) could not be configuration. If the problem
detected on the CAN bus, SCG persists, check the VCC
mode cannot be used connections and that the
VCC has the correct
software.
Note: An not calibrated VCC will reject an operational address. This will show up as a warning in the auto-
configuration procedure.
VR_MOTOR_CONTROL_FAIL 150 Motor failed to start / stop Check that FPGA is active
VR_FLOW_VALVE_CONTROL_FAIL 151 VR flow valve control (either
power or open) failed to be
controlled
VR_FLOW_VALVE_POWER_FAIL 152 VR flow valve power failed to
be controlled
VR_FLOW_VALVE_OPEN_FAIL 153 VR flow valve aperture failed to
be controlled
VR_RETURN_VALVE_CONTROL_FAIL 154 VR return valve failed to be Check that HYM is active
controlled (either power or
open/close)
VR_RETURN_VALVE_POWER_FAIL 155 VR return valve power failed to
be controlled
VR_RETURN_VALVE_OPEN_FAIL 156 VR return valve open/close
failed to be controlled
VR_GALLUS_CONTROL_ERROR 157 Failed to start / stop the gallus Check that PP is active
measurements
VR_SET_VRLED_ERR 234 Failed to control the VR LED. Check that the display is
This error is reported in a log active
instead of being displayed

10.2.3.8.PROTOCOL HANDLER ERRORS (MOD ID = 90–94)


Mod ID = 90 for Protocol, 91 for Application PUMP A, 92 for PUMP B, 93 for PUMP C, 94 for PUMP D.

Error ID Name Error ID Root Cause Solution


Number
PROT_ERROR_COMM_BOARD 100 No communication Check the LED on the COM board is
with the comm board blinking and the board has the correct
software. Replace the COM board if
necessary.
PROT_ERROR_COMMUNICATION 101 No communication Check communication settings (non-
with the POS conflicting address) and cabling.

10.2.3.9.DISPLAY HANDLER ERROR (MOD ID = 110)

Copyright  2015 Tokheim


TQC Service Manual V12.3 Page 184 of 226
Error ID Name Error ID Root Cause Solution
Number
DISP_UNITPRICE_ERROR 102
DISP_UNITPRICE_COMMA_ERROR 106
DISP_VOLUME_COMMA_ERROR 107
DISP_AMOUNT_COMMA_ERROR 108
DISP_DISPLAY_OFF_LINE 109
DISP_DISPLAY_UPDATE_ERROR 110

10.2.4. ALL HARDWARE MODULE COMMON ERRORS 00–99 (MOD ID =


1000–9999)
Error ID Name Error ID Root Cause Solution
Number
FLASH_FAILURE 1
CHECKSUM_FAILURE 2
RAM_FAILURE 3
WATCHDOG_RESET 4
DEVICE_CONFIGURATION_ERROR 5
CAN_CONFIGURATION_ERROR 6
CAN_COMMUNICATION_ERROR 7
HEARTBEAT_TIMEOUT 16

10.2.5. HARDWARE MODULE SPECIFIC ERRORS 100-999 (MOD ID = 1000–


9999)
10.2.5.1.PRE-PROCESSOR MODULE ERROR (MOD ID = 1200)
Error ID Name Error ID Root Cause Solution
Number
see also the hardware module common errors 00–99 (section 10.2.4).
PP_CHECKSUM_ERROR 100 Corrupt software detected Download correct pre-
during power up processor software
PP_MAX_FLOW_ERROR 101 One of the meters is blocked or Control meters and
a valve problem valves
PP_ONE_METER_NOT_RUNNING_ERROR 102 One of the meters is blocked or
a valve problem
PP_10_X_SLOW_FLOW_ERROR 103 Meters or valves problem
PP_FRAUD_DETECTED_ERROR 104 MP1: pulse(s) detected when No fraud allowed
MP1 not in delivery
PP_PULSER_NOT_CONNECTED_ERROR 111 MP1: during pre-delivery test Connect a (new) pulser
both pulser lines are low
MPC: 30ms no pulser volume
update when in delivery mode

10.2.5.2.CAN DISPLAY MODULE ERROR (MOD ID = 1300–1307)


Mod ID = 130X:
Even values for X denote master displays: 1300 = A, 1302 = B, 1304 = C, 1306 = D.
Odd values for X denote slave displays: 1301 = A, 1303 = B, 1305 = C, 1307 = D.
Note: After re-wiring CAN cables, an auto-configuration is required to re-assign CAN addresses and Mod IDs.

Error ID Name Error ID Root Cause Solution


Number
see also the hardware module common errors 00–99 (section 10.2.4).
CSD_RAM_DEFECT 100
CSD_FLASH_DEFECT 101
CSD_CONFIG_PAR_ERROR 102
CSD_SDO_CRC_ERROR 103
CSD_CAN_COM_ERROR 104

Copyright  2015 Tokheim


TQC Service Manual V12.3 Page 185 of 226
Error ID Name Error ID Root Cause Solution
Number
CSD_PDO_CRC_ERROR 105
CSD_UPD_NUMBER_ERROR 106
CSD_DATA_STORE_ERROR 107

10.2.5.3.PULSER ERROR (MOD ID = 1400–1415)


Mod ID = 14XX: XX is the meter number - 1.
Note: After re-wiring CAN cables, an auto-configuration is required to re-assign CAN addresses and Mod IDs.

Error ID Name Error ID Root Cause Solution


Number
see also the hardware module common errors 00–99 (section 10.2.4).
MPC_ERR_FLASH_PROG_CRC 100 Corrupt software detected Download correct software or
during power up replace the MPC
MPC_ERR_CONFIG_MSG_CRC 101 Get or set configuration Send correct get/set
message corrupt configuration message
MPC_ERR_FLASH_WRITING 102 Broken flash Replace the MPC
MPC_ERR_CAN_OVERFLOW 103 CAN-bus communication Check possible CAN problems
problem in the dispenser; if the problem
persists, replace the MPC
MPC_ERR_SENSOR 104 Broken sensor A, B or C Replace the MPC
MPC_ERR_SEQUENCE 105 Pulse lines are not following Disconnect and connect the
each other MPC or replace the MPC
MPC_ERR_STATE_ERROR 106 For debug purposes Check the correct software is
(normally not shown on the installed
display)
MPC_ERR_MAX_BACK 107 Pulser reached max volume Change direction or replace the
turning in the wrong direction MPC
MPC_ERR_BACKWARD 108 Pulser turning in the wrong
direction
MPC_ERR_ADC_CALIBR 110 ADC calibration failed; Replace the MPC
broken ADC
MPC_ERR_ADC_STATUS 111
MPC_ERR_IDLE_VOLUME_DETECT 112 Pulse(s) detected when No fraud
pulser in IDLE mode
MPC_ERR_LPG_FACTOR 113 Calculated TC factor for LPG Send correct density for LPG
lower than 0; wrong density
send for LPG
MPC_ERR_PT100_NOT_CONNECTED 119 No PT100 temperature Connect (new) PT100
probe connected or broken temperature probe
wires
MPC_ERR_MAGNET_ERROR 120

10.2.5.4.HYM BOARD ERROR (MOD ID = 1500–1505)


Mod ID = 150X: X + 1 corresponds to the HYM position, from the left on the IO board.
Note: Faulty HYM hardware might report an incorrect module ID (but still in the 1500–1505 range) as it might
fail to electronically read out its position on the IO board.

Error ID Name Error ID Root Cause Solution


Number
see also the hardware module common errors 00–99 (section 10.2.4).

10.2.5.5.VCC BOARD ERROR (MOD ID = 1600–1601)


Mod ID = 1600 for PUMP A&B.
Mod ID = 1601 for PUMP C&D.
Note: After re-wiring CAN cables, an auto-configuration is required to re-assign CAN addresses and Mod IDs.

Copyright  2015 Tokheim


TQC Service Manual V12.3 Page 186 of 226
Error ID Name Error ID Root Cause Solution
Number
see also the hardware module common errors 00–99 (section 10.2.4).
VCC_ERR_FLASH_WRITING 102 A flash error has occurred while Replace the
attempting to write setup, configuration VCC unit
and calibration data to flash
VCC_ERR_FLASH_UNINITIALIZED 103 Uninitialized flash memory, not calibratedRe-calibrate
VCC the VCC on a
VCC test
bench and/or
replace with a
calibrated
unit
VCC_ERR_FLASH_FUTURE_LAYOUT 104 Unsupported future flash layout Perform VCC
software
update to a
software
version that
does not
generate this
error or
replace the
unit with a
calibrated
spare
VCC_ERR_FLASH_CRC_MISMATCH 105 Flash CRC was incorrect Replace the
VCC unit
VCC_ERR_ADC_STATUS_PA 112 VCC pressure A side was measured Is the nozzle
outside the measurement window of ±300 pointing in a
mbar; 'down'
Defective VCC; position?
Blockage in the VR system; Is the hose
Valve not opening; free of twists?
Blocked VR filter Check for
system
blockage
Contact third-
level support
if problem
persists
VCC_ERR_ADC_STATUS_VA 113 VCC flow sensor connection is broken Replace unit
with a
calibrated
spare
VCC_ERR_ADC_STATUS_PB 114 B-side equivalent of error -
VCC_ERR_ADC_STATUS_PA
VCC_ERR_ADC_STATUS_VB 115 B-side equivalent of error
VCC_ERR_ADC_STATUS_VA
VCC_ERR_NO_FLOW 120 No flow measured while there was (some) Contact third-
pressure; blockage level support
VCC_ERR_PRESSURE_DROP_TOO_HIGH 123 Pressure drop too high compared to the if problem
flow rate persists
VCC_ERR_PRESSURE_DROP_TOO_LOW 124 Pressure too low compared to the flow
rate
VCC_ERR_FLOW_A_DC_LEVEL 128 VCC flow sensor is out of balance Check for
VCC_ERR_FLOW_B_DC_LEVEL 129 B-side equivalent of error blockage,
VCC_ERR_FLOW_A_DC_LEVEL contact third-
level support
if problem
persists

Copyright  2015 Tokheim


TQC Service Manual V12.3 Page 187 of 226
Error ID Name Error ID Root Cause Solution
Number
VCC_ERR_ADC_CHANNEL_MISMATCH 131 The ADC has measured a different Contact third-
channel than expected level support
VCC_ADC_INIT_ERROR 132 (Initial) ADC communications failed; is the if problem
ADC present or broken persists
VCC_ERR_VCC_CAL_CANCELLED 135 Calibration measurement was probably Re-calibrate
cancelled VCC
Note: This error will only be generated on
a VCC test bench during a calibration
session.
VCC_ERR_ADC_STATUS_PA_ZCAL 140 During pressure sensor A-side self test at Possible
startup of the VCC a problem was found in defective
measuring the zero-level of the one of the VFM, Contact
ADC channels third-level
VCC_ERR_ADC_STATUS_PA_FCAL 141 During pressure sensor A-side self test at support if
startup of the VCC a problem was found in problem
measuring the current of one of the ADC persists
channels
VCC_ERR_ADC_STATUS_VA_ZCAL 144 Same as error
VCC_ERR_ADC_STATUS_PA_ZCAL for
the flow-sensor voltage, A-side
VCC_ERR_ADC_STATUS_VA_FCAL 145 Same as error
VCC_ERR_ADC_STATUS_PA_FCAL for
the flow-sensor voltage, A-side
VCC_ERR_ADC_STATUS_PB_ZCAL 142 Same as error
VCC_ERR_ADC_STATUS_PA_ZCAL, B-
side
VCC_ERR_ADC_STATUS_PB_FCAL 143 Same as error
VCC_ERR_ADC_STATUS_PA_FCAL, B-
side
VCC_ERR_ADC_STATUS_VB_ZCAL 146 Same as error
VCC_ERR_ADC_STATUS_VA_ZCAL, B-
side
VCC_ERR_ADC_STATUS_VB_FCAL 147 Same as error
VCC_ERR_ADC_STATUS_VA_FCAL, B-
side

10.2.5.6.COMM BOARD ERROR (MOD ID = 1700–1701)


Mod ID = 1700 for the primary (right-most placed) board.
Mod ID = 1701 for the secondary board (left of the primary board).

Error ID Name Error ID Root Cause Solution


Number
see also the hardware module common errors 00–99 (section 10.2.4).
COMM_SDO_CRC_ERROR 103
COMM_DATA_STORE_ERROR 107

10.2.5.7.SLAVE IO (SIO) BOARD ERROR (MOD ID = 1800–1803)


Module ID 180X: X + 1 corresponds to the SIO's cable position, counted from the IO board connection.
Note: After re-wiring CAN cables, an auto-configuration is required to re-assign CAN addresses and Mod IDs.

Error ID Name Error ID Root Cause Solution


Number
see also the hardware module common errors 00–99 (section 10.2.4).

10.2.5.8.UI MODULE ERRORS (MOD ID = 2100–2103)


Mod ID = 2100 for PUMP A, 2101 for PUMP B, 2102 for PUMP C, 2103 for PUMP D.

Copyright  2015 Tokheim


TQC Service Manual V12.3 Page 188 of 226
Error ID Name Error ID Root Cause Solution
Number
see also the hardware module common errors 00–99 (section 10.2.4).
UI_RAM_DEFECT 100
UI_FLASH_DEFECT 101
UI_CONFIG_PAR_ERROR 102
UI_SDO_CRC_ERROR 103
UI_CAN_COM_ERROR 104
UI_PDO_CRC_ERROR 105
UI_DATA_STORE_ERROR 106
UI_CMD_PAR_ERROR 107

10.2.5.9.KEYPAD BOARD ERROR (MOD ID = 2200–2203)


Mod ID = 2200 for PUMP A, 2201 for PUMP B, 2202 for PUMP C, 2203 for PUMP D.
Note: After re-wiring CAN cables, an auto-configuration is required to re-assign CAN addresses and Mod IDs.

Error ID Name Error ID Root Cause Solution


Number
see also the hardware module common errors 00–99 (section 10.2.4).

10.2.5.10. LEAK DETECTION BOARD ERROR (MOD ID = 2300)


Error ID Name Error ID Root Cause Solution
Number
see also the hardware module common errors 00–99 (section 10.2.4).

10.2.5.11. KEYPAD, DISPLAY AND PRINTER (KDP) BOARD ERROR


(MOD ID = 2400–2403)
Mod ID = 2400 for PUMP A, 2401 for PUMP B, 2402 for PUMP C, 2403 for PUMP D.
Note: After re-wiring CAN cables, an auto-configuration is required to re-assign CAN addresses and Mod IDs.

Error ID Name Error ID Root Cause Solution


Number
see also the hardware module common errors 00–99 (section 10.2.4).
KDP_PRINTER_OFFLINE_ERROR 104

10.2.5.12. CARD READER BOARD ERROR (MOD ID = 2500–2503)


Mod ID = 2500 for PUMP A, 2501 for PUMP B, 2502 for PUMP C, 2503 for PUMP D.
Note: After re-wiring CAN cables, an auto-configuration is required to re-assign CAN addresses and Mod IDs.

Error ID Name Error ID Root Cause Solution


Number
see also the hardware module common errors 00–99 (section 10.2.4).

Copyright  2015 Tokheim


TQC Service Manual V12.3 Page 189 of 226
11. TQC SPARE PART LIST
Always check latest on EuroEng. Website.

Features Part No. Description Remarks


Powersupply TQC 942696 PCB/TQC005/PSU Not needed for TQC-VGA
947463 PCB/TQC005L3/PSU-VGA Only needed for TQC-VGA
943725 Transformer 25V 160VA Including ferrule and
terminals; not needed for
TQC-VGA
942357 Transformer 25V 225VA Including ferrule and
terminals; only needed for
TQC-VGA
900075-001 Battery 6V 1.2Ah Not needed for TQC-VGA
900072-001 Battery 12V 1.2Ah Not needed for TQC-VGA
944788-001 Battery 12V 4Ah Only needed for TQC-VGA
906645-001 Netfilter Schaffner
903483-007 Fuse 2A T Not needed for TQC-VGA
903483-003 Fuse 3.15 T Only needed for TQC-VGA
947253-001 TQC thermistor NTC Assy 450mm Only needed for TQC-VGA;
for Q410 use 947253-002
(1200mm)
TQC EIO Calculator 955515-004 TQC EIO Assy + TQC Application Incl. EIO, APB and Cover

955516-004 TQC EIO non VR Assy + TQC Incl. EIO, APB and Cover
955514 TQC-APB5 (Sitara) + TQC Application Only APB
944073 TQC Hym seal right
944072 TQC Hym seal left
944074 TQC EMT seal
901689-xxx TQC Seal Sticker: 235 for Dundee, 236
for Grentheville, 237 for Bladel, 238 for
SSD
942184 PCB/TQC002/HYM Hydraulic Module
943536-001 Connector 2p with wire link
(Neutralization nozzle jumper)
TQC EST Calculator 955517-003 TQC EST Assy + TQC Application Incl. EST, APB and Cover
950740 Sealing Cap EMT EST version
950739 Sealing Cap Pulsers EST version

LCD Display 945222 TQC CSD 1 UPD+Termination


949575 TQC CSD-PPU 1 UPD+Termination WWC Dial Plate Layout
Compatible
945225 TQC CSD Assy 4 UPD+Termination
943349-001 Cable Assy Display 7 WAY L=900 Side B
943349-002 Cable Assy Display 7 WAY L=1400 Side A
943354 Display termination connector

900249-001 Assy cable comms 8-way L=2300 Depends on Comms type


900285-001 Assy cable comms 4-way L=2300 Depends on Comms type
942692 PCB comms TQC007, LON
944581 PCB comms TQC012, TOK ( single
channel )
TQC Comms 949253 PCB comms TQC029, ZSR-DUN
942693 PCB comms TQC008, EIN
942695 PCB comms TQC010, EPS
947037 PCB comms TQC022, DART
950392 PCB comms TQC031, MTT (M32) /
Gilbarco (V2)

Copyright  2015 Tokheim


TQC Service Manual V12.3 Page 190 of 226
Features Part No. Description Remarks
942694 PCB comms TQC009, logitron
952864 PCB comms TQC035, Kienzle
Mains Junction Box 900258 Assy Junc Box M2000 942758 -
942762, 943953
Heater 909214-001 Heater DBK 350W Payment related!!!

Slave I/O board 942687 PCB/TQC006/SIO/Slave IO board Slave IO board


900862-008 Connector pitch 3.81mm 8p
900862-009 Connector pitch 3.81mm 9p
943348-002 Cable Assy CAN 4 WAY
ECVR 942387 Energy Limiting Unit for CAN
943348-001 Cable Assy CAN 4 way
944492 VFM-CAN assy
943353-001 Cable Assy VFM CAN
943365-007 Connector pitch 3.81mm 7p inverted
Pulser (MPL) 943358 TQC MPL including cable
Pulser (MPC) 943360 TQC MPC including cable
Pulser (MPL6) 950954 TQC MPL including cable
Pulser (MPC6) 950956 TQC MPC including cable
Temperature 909544 Temperature adaptor assy – TC, incl.
Compensation connectors
Submerged standard 944844 Relay & Socket Assy TS35 Replaces 902236-001 &
902237-001
903551-001 Assy Cable LIYY 4x0.5qmm L = 1000
902446-003 Cable 7x0.75 L=1500
903525-012 Assy Wire Black L=200
909416-002 PE terminal
909416-001 3 way terminal
909416-003 End plate orange
909416-004 Jumper 2 way For 4 products or 5
products only!
901432-004 Rail TS-35 L= 320 Used for options OPT lamp,
slave CSD
Single phase motor 906560 Capacitor box base see diagram 902044, 1 ph
motor
Max 4 products 906529 Capacitor box top Fitted in payment area! (set
661624-005)
906572 Capacitor box side
906824 Assy capacitor box fixing
907315-007 Capacitor start 0.75kW 60Hz
907315-008 Capacitor run 0.75kW 60Hz
907315-006 Capacitor VR motor
907687-001 Capacitor lid ID 60
907687-002 Capacitor lid ID 40 (also for vr motor)
906559-001 Wire assy between capacitors

40/80 l/min speed 902503-002 Microswitch Combined with OPT lamp,


selection uses the same connector

OPT lamps 902308 OPT Lamp-base


902313-001 E27 Lampfitting
902436 EA Cable OPT LAMP 3x0.75
Fuse holder + fuse 944844 Relay & Socket Assy TS35 Replaces 902236-001 &
On Rail 1 Power (5) 902237-001
903525-016 Wire assy orange 0.75 L=200
903525-012 Wire assy black 0.75 L=200
909416-002 Clamp 0.13-2.5mm 4 way GREEN
YELLOW

Copyright  2015 Tokheim


TQC Service Manual V12.3 Page 191 of 226
Features Part No. Description Remarks
No jumper needed 909416-001 Clamp 0.13-2.5mm 3 way GREY
909416-003 Endplate Orange
909416-006 Endbracket
903525-003 Assy wire 1x0.75mm Black L=100
OPTimum (see 902075 OPT Power Supply
OPTimum POM)
900013-001 Nut Hexagon Self Locking M4 For fixation 902075
904694-001 Cable Assy IQ VGA - PIB
909214-001 Heater DBK 350W Located in the drawer area
900013-001 Nut Hexagon Self Locking M4 For fixation 909214-001
900254-003 Assy cable 5x1.5mm 2x230Vac L=1000
904228-003 Assy wire 1x1.5 black L=100
909416-001 Clamp 0.13-2.5mm 3 way GREY
909416-004 Jumper 2 way
905326 Assy/I2B485/OPT RS485 Isolator
Ferrite (on side of OPT power
connection)

OPT Comms 9xxxxx Assy Cable comms x way L=1700 Depends on Comms type
904224 Assy Cable Comms RS 485 Depends on Comms type

IQ7000 power / 906645-002 Netfilter Schaffner


comms
dgm 906116-022 909371-001 Cable 3 x 1.5mm L = 500 Length checked in qt1,
July02-08
As 500T1 900353 Ground tag
Ferrite, (on side of opt power Wires of 909371-002
connection) looped trough it
Low temperature kit 909214-001 Heater DBK 350W Including cable
standard

Speaker 901057 8 ohm Speaker PA


907482 EA Transformer 100V Speaker Trafo 900302
900260-001 Assy cable COMMS 4 way
909416-013 Clamp 2x2x0.13 - 2.5
909416-014 Endplate orange for clamp -013
909416-006 Endbracket
907510 Bracket 100V transformer
Main safety switch 900074-001 Main Switch see diagram 906116-005
900268-002 Cable assy 7 x 1.5mm L = 1600
Programming switch 952887 Magnetic Proximity Switch NC
900092 Nozzle Switch Magnet
900756 Bracket prog reed switch Fitted in calc housing

TQC SD Card 948309-002 Memory SD card 1GB

TQC Ethernet Switch 946590-001 Switch Ethernet 10/100 5 Ports


Power cable switch 950025 Cable Assy power 24V TQC-X12 Not for EST
Features Part no. Description Remarks
TQC-VGA SBS iBase 9446930-001 TQC-VGA SBC Bracket iBase
TQC-VGA SBS 9446930-002 TQC-VGA SBC Bracket Avalue + DC-
Avalue DC
TQC-VGA SBS 9446930-003 TQC-VGA SBC Bracket Avalue + PSI
Avalue

TQC-VGA Display 944688 (Assy Display) Main Bracket Equipped


assy ( CCFL version ) 17" TFT
TQC-VGA LED 950057 (Assy Display new LED version)

Copyright  2015 Tokheim


TQC Service Manual V12.3 Page 192 of 226
Features Part No. Description Remarks
Display assy

DVRC2 ( Fafnir ) 952762 Assy TQC SCN RS232 to RS485 Not for EST
DVRC2 cable 952867 TQC RS232 Cable Not for EST

Empty tank contact (I) 909416-001 3 x 0.13 clamp In mains box


909416-003 End plate orange In mains box
903551-003 Assy cable liyy 4x0.5qmm L = 2500 In mains box

Fire detection 903291 Fire detector Stahl


standard
Rail 2 (Fire Detection, 941654-001 Contactor 230Vac 4kW@400V
satellite etc.)
941653 Mechanical latch
900268-005 EA Assy Cable 7x1.5qmm L=400
904233-003 Cable 3x1.5 1.2,gn/ye L=1700
909416-002 Clamp 0.13-2.5mm 4 way GREEN Rail 2
YELLOW
909416-001 Clamp 0.13-2.5mm 3 way GREY
909416-003 Endplate Orange
909416-004 Jumper 2 way
909416-006 Endbracket
904228-001 Assy Wire blue 1.5 mm² L=200
Fire det. single and tilt 903291 Fire detector Stahl
sensor
905176 Vibration Contact
906193-001 Clip Nut for DIN-rail
909416-013 Clamp 2 x 2 0.13-2.5mm GREY
909416-002 Clamp 0.13-2.5mm 4 way GREEN
YELLOW
905185-002 Cable 3x0.75qmm L=1500 To vibration contact in calc
box
905185-001 Cable 3x0.75qmm L=500 To Fire detector hydraulics
909416-014 Endplate Orange for -013
901753 Assy Junctionbox Bernstn CA150 Fire detection junction box
Fire det. double and 903291 Fire detector Stahl see list Fire det. single and
tilt sensor tilt sensor +
909416-013 Clamp 2 x 2 0.13-2.5mm GREY
905185-001 Cable 3x0.75qmm L=500 To Fire detector hydraulics
Emergency Switch 902506 Bracket
(LPG)
see drw 902508 902504 Spacer switch
902503-001 Micro switch
902502-001 Mount switch
902501-002 Button red
900024-010 Spacer

High Speed button Push button assy All connections on HYM


(contin. filling)

902503-002 Switch

Satellite Cable like 943349, one side ferrules L Between master csd and
= 1100 sat term in calc
Checked length 909416-006 Endclamp
L=1100 is ok.
Longest cable is from 909416-013 Clamp 2x2x0.13 - 2.5 4 terminals for one sided
csd side A master - sat

Copyright  2015 Tokheim


TQC Service Manual V12.3 Page 193 of 226
Features Part No. Description Remarks
Through clips 909416-014 Endplate orange for clamp -013
909416-002 Clamps 4 way GN/YE 2.5qmm
909416-003 Endplate orange
900271-001 Cable 16 x 0.5 L = 2000 Between sat term in calc
housing and Jbox
Hand Held Terminal 943133 HHT/Configuration Device TQC
Hand Held Terminal 954437 IR-eye with controller box
Extender
Hand Held Terminal 954019 Null modem cable for direct HHT –
Null-Modem cable TQC connection
TQC Debug adapter 946441 TQC Debug adapter/ISP prog
Calibration Service 951503 TQC Gallus Interface Assy Only needed on EIO v6 and
Tool newer.

Copyright  2015 Tokheim


TQC Service Manual V12.3 Page 194 of 226
12. WIRING SCHEMATICS
12.1. TQC-LCD/VGA

Copyright  2015 Tokheim


TQC Service Manual V12.3 Page 195 of 226
Copyright  2015 Tokheim
TQC Service Manual V12.3 Page 196 of 226
Copyright  2015 Tokheim
TQC Service Manual V12.3 Page 197 of 226
Copyright  2015 Tokheim
TQC Service Manual V12.3 Page 198 of 226
13. SOME HYDRAULIC SETUPS
13.1. SETUP NAME & HYM ASINGMENT RELATION
Nr Setup Name HYM1 HYM2 HYM3 HYM4 HYM5 Remarks
1. Q11-X.NA X N - - -
2. Q11-X.NB X N - - -
3. Q11-VA VSA - - - -
4. Q11-3X.VA X X X VSA -
5. Q12-X.N2 X N - - -
6. Q12-N2 N - - - -
7. Q12-X.HSA X NSA - - -
8. Q12-H2 N - - - -
9. Q12-VSA VSA - - - -
10. Q12-3X.VSA X X X VSA -
11. Q13-VSNA VSNA VSNAB - - -
12. Q22-2NA N N - - -
13. Q22-2NB N N - - -
14. Q22-HA.HB N N - - -
15. Q22-HA.HPB N N - - -
16. Q22-LA.LB LA LB - - -
17. Q22-NA.HA N N
18. Q22-VA.VB VSA VSB - - -
19. Q22-VA.VPB VSA VSB - - -
20. Q22-VB.2X.VA VSB X X VSA -
21. Q22-VB.2X.VPA VSB X X VSA -
22. Q23-VB.2X.VSA VSB X X VSA -
23. Q23-VB.2X.VSPA VSB X X VSA -
24. Q23-VSB.2X.VA VSB X X VSA -
25. Q23-VSB.2X.VPA VSB X X VSA -
26. Q24-2N2 N N - - -
27. Q24-X.2N2 X N N - -
28. Q24-N2.X.N2 N X N - -
29. Q24-N2.2X.N2 N X X N -
30. Q24-N2.2X.H2 N X X N -
31. Q24-VSA.VSB VSA VSB - - -
32. Q24-VSA.VSPB VSA VSB - - -
33. Q24-VSB.2X.VSA VSB X X VSA -
34. Q24-VSB.2X.VSPA VSB X X VSA -
35. Q24-VNB.2X.VNA VSNB X X VSNA VSNAB
36. Q24-VNB.2X.VNPA VSNB X X VSNA VSNAB
37. Q26-VSNA.VSNB VSNA VSNB VSNAB - -
38. Q26-VSNA.VSNPB VSNA VSNB VSNAB - -
39. Q33-3NA N N N - -
40. Q33-X.3NA X N N N -
41. Q33-NA.X.2NA N X N N -
42. Q33-2NA.X.NA N N X N -
43. Q33-3NB N N N - -
44. Q33-X.3NB X N N N -
45. Q33-NB.X.2NB N X N N -
46. Q33-2NB.X.NB N N X N -
47. Q34-N2.HA.HB N N N - -
48. Q34-N2.HA.HPB N N N - -
49. Q35-2N2.LA N N LA - -
50. Q35-X.2N2.LA X N N LA -
51. Q35-N2.X.N2.LA N X N LA -
52. Q35-2N2.X.LA N N X LA -
53. Q35-2N2.LB N N LB - -
54. Q35-X.2N2.LB X N N LB -
55. Q35-N2.X.N2.LB N X N LB -

Copyright  2015 Tokheim


TQC Service Manual V12.3 Page 199 of 226
Nr Setup Name HYM1 HYM2 HYM3 HYM4 HYM5 Remarks
56. Q35-2N2.X.LB N N X LB -
57. Q36-3N2 N N N - -
58. Q36-X.3N2 X N N N -
59. Q36-N2.X.2N2 N X N N -
60. Q36-N2.X.N2.H2 N X N N -
61. Q36-2N2.X.N2 N N X N -
62. Q38-N2.VSNA.VSNB N VSNA VSNB VSNAB -
63. Q38-N2.VSNA.VSNPB N VSNA VSNB VSNAB -
64. Q44-4NA N N N N -
65. Q44-4NB N N N N -
66. Q44-VA.VPB.VPA.VPB VSA VSB VSA VSB - 2x 2 VHS products
67. Q46-2N2.HA.HB N N N N -
68. Q46-2N2.HA.HPB N N N N -
69. Q46-2N2.LB.LA N N LB LA -
70. Q46-X.2N2.LB.LA X N N LB LA
71. Q46-N2.X.N2.LB.LA N X N LB LA Q36-N2.X.N2.L2
72. Q46-2N2.X.LB.LA N N X LB LA Q36-2N2.X.L2
73. Q47-2N2.X.HA.HSB N N X N NSB
74. Q47-2N2.X.HA.HSPB N N X N NSB
75. Q47-2N2.X.HSA.HB N N X NSA N
76. Q47-2N2.X.HSA.HPB N N X NSA N
77. Q47-2N2.X.N2.LA N N X N LA
78. Q47-2N2.X.N2.LB N N X N LB
79. Q47-3N2.LA N N N LA -
80. Q47-3N2.LB N N N LB -
81. Q47-3N2.X.HB N N N X N
82. Q47-3N2.X.LA N N N X LA
83. Q47-3N2.X.LB N N N X LB
84. Q47-N2.X.2N2.LA N X N N LA
85. Q47-N2.X.2N2.LB N X N N LB
86. Q47-N2.X.N2.HA.HSB N X N N NSB
87. Q47-N2.X.N2.HA.HSPB N X N N NSB
88. Q47-N2.X.N2.HSA.HB N X N NSA N
89. Q47-N2.X.N2.HSA.HPB N X N NSA N
90. Q47-X.2N2.HA.HSB X N N N NSB
91. Q47-X.2N2.HA.HSPB X N N N NSB
92. Q47-X.2N2.HSA.HB X N N NSA N
93. Q47-X.2N2.HSA.HPB X N N NSA N
94. Q47-X.3N2.LA X N N N LA
95. Q47-X.3N2.LB X N N N LB
96. Q48-2N2.VNA.VNB N N VSNA VSNB VSNAB
97. Q48-2N2.VNA.VNPB N N VSNA VSNB VSNAB
98. Q48-2N2.X.2N2 N N X N N
99. Q48-2N2.X.HSA.HSB N N X NSA NSB
100. Q48-2N2.X.HSA.HSPB N N X NSA NSB
101. Q48-3N2.H2 N N N N
102. Q48-3N2.HSA N N N NSA -
103. Q48-3N2.X.HSB N N N X NSB
104. Q48-3N2.X.N2 N N N X N
105. Q48-4N2 N N N N -
106. Q48-N2.X.3N2 N X N N N
107. Q48-N2.X.N2.HSA.HSB N X N NSA NSB
108. Q48-N2.X.N2.HSA.HSPB N X N NSA NSB
109. Q48-X.2N2.HSA.HSB X N N NSA NSB
110. Q48-X.2N2.HSA.HSPB X N N NSA NSB
111. Q48-X.4N2 X N N N N
112. Q48-X.3N2.L2 X N N N L2

Copyright  2015 Tokheim


TQC Service Manual V12.3 Page 200 of 226
Nr Setup Name HYM1 HYM2 HYM3 HYM4 HYM5 Remarks
113. Q48-N2.X.2N2.L2 N X N N L2
114. Q48-2N2.X.N2.L2 N N X N L2
115. Q48-3N2.X.L2 N N N X L2
116. Q55-4NA.VB N N N N VSB
117. Q55-4NB.VA N N N N VSA
118. Q56-4NA.VSB N N N N VSB
119. Q56-4NB.VSA N N N N VSA
120. Q58-3N2.HA.HB N N N N N
121. Q58-3N2.HA.HPB N N N N N
122. Q58-3N2.LB.LA N N N LB LA Q48-3N2.L2
123. Q58-3N2.NA.VPB N N N N VSB
124. Q58-3N2.VA.NPB N N N VSA N
125. Q59-3N2.HA.HSB N N N N NSB
126. Q59-3N2.HA.HSPB N N N N NSB
127. Q510-3N2.HSA.HSB N N N NSA NSB
128. Q510-3N2.HSA.HSPB N N N NSA NSB
129. Q510-3N2.VSA.VSB N N N VSA VSB
130. Q510-4N2.H2 N N N N N
131. Q510-4N2.L2 N N N N L2
132. Q510-4N2.LM2 N N N N L2 LPG Motor on SIO
133. Q510-5N2 N N N N N

Always check 943364 latest rev. on EuroEng. Website.

13.2. SCHEMATICS

Copyright  2015 Tokheim


TQC Service Manual V12.3 Page 201 of 226
Copyright  2015 Tokheim
TQC Service Manual V12.3 Page 202 of 226
Copyright  2015 Tokheim
TQC Service Manual V12.3 Page 203 of 226
Copyright  2015 Tokheim
TQC Service Manual V12.3 Page 204 of 226
Copyright  2015 Tokheim
TQC Service Manual V12.3 Page 205 of 226
Copyright  2015 Tokheim
TQC Service Manual V12.3 Page 206 of 226
Copyright  2015 Tokheim
TQC Service Manual V12.3 Page 207 of 226
Copyright  2015 Tokheim
TQC Service Manual V12.3 Page 208 of 226
Copyright  2015 Tokheim
TQC Service Manual V12.3 Page 209 of 226
Copyright  2015 Tokheim
TQC Service Manual V12.3 Page 210 of 226
Copyright  2015 Tokheim
TQC Service Manual V12.3 Page 211 of 226
Copyright  2015 Tokheim
TQC Service Manual V12.3 Page 212 of 226
Copyright  2015 Tokheim
TQC Service Manual V12.3 Page 213 of 226
Copyright  2015 Tokheim
TQC Service Manual V12.3 Page 214 of 226
Copyright  2015 Tokheim
TQC Service Manual V12.3 Page 215 of 226
Copyright  2015 Tokheim
TQC Service Manual V12.3 Page 216 of 226
Copyright  2015 Tokheim
TQC Service Manual V12.3 Page 217 of 226
Copyright  2015 Tokheim
TQC Service Manual V12.3 Page 218 of 226
Copyright  2015 Tokheim
TQC Service Manual V12.3 Page 219 of 226
Copyright  2015 Tokheim
TQC Service Manual V12.3 Page 220 of 226
Copyright  2015 Tokheim
TQC Service Manual V12.3 Page 221 of 226
Copyright  2015 Tokheim
TQC Service Manual V12.3 Page 222 of 226
14. GPIO CONFIGURATION
In TQC the assignment of the inputs/outputs to a certain function is done in a flexible way. For that a number of
“setups” are defined. By selecting the best setup, it is the intention that in almost all cases all required IO
functions can be physically assigned to the EIO board. In this case, the SIO board with the additional
inputs/outputs is not required.

In the table below (GPIO setups), 8 setups are defined. These define the function of the outputs on EIO and SIO.
Thus, in the configuration menu there is only one parameter to be entered: button setup. You can then select
one of the defined GPIO setups.
Always check 943757 latest rev. on EuroEng. website.

Copyright  2015 Tokheim


TQC Service Manual V12.3 Page 223 of 226
Copyright  2015 Tokheim
TQC Service Manual V12.3 Page 224 of 226
Copyright  2015 Tokheim
Copyright  2015 Tokheim
TQC Service Manual V12.3 Page 226 of 226

You might also like